xref: /dragonfly/contrib/gcc-8.0/gcc/cse.c (revision 38fd149817dfbff97799f62fcb70be98c4e32523)
1 /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2    Copyright (C) 1987-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 
4 This file is part of GCC.
5 
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
10 
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
15 
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3.  If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.  */
19 
20 #include "config.h"
21 #include "system.h"
22 #include "coretypes.h"
23 #include "backend.h"
24 #include "target.h"
25 #include "rtl.h"
26 #include "tree.h"
27 #include "cfghooks.h"
28 #include "df.h"
29 #include "memmodel.h"
30 #include "tm_p.h"
31 #include "insn-config.h"
32 #include "regs.h"
33 #include "emit-rtl.h"
34 #include "recog.h"
35 #include "cfgrtl.h"
36 #include "cfganal.h"
37 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
38 #include "alias.h"
39 #include "toplev.h"
40 #include "params.h"
41 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
42 #include "tree-pass.h"
43 #include "dbgcnt.h"
44 #include "rtl-iter.h"
45 
46 /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
47    through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
48    have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
49    expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
50 
51    It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
52    when control paths merge in this code; so, at each label, we forget all
53    that is known and start fresh.  This can be described as processing each
54    extended basic block separately.  We have a separate pass to perform
55    global CSE.
56 
57    Note CSE can turn a conditional or computed jump into a nop or
58    an unconditional jump.  When this occurs we arrange to run the jump
59    optimizer after CSE to delete the unreachable code.
60 
61    We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
62    a hash table for most expressions, and a vector of "quantity
63    numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
64 
65    The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
66    because it is faster.  It is possible because registers references
67    contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
68    a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
69    identical if they have the same number.  General expressions
70    do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
71    information recorded on an expression other than a register
72    is to keep it in a hash table.
73 
74 Registers and "quantity numbers":
75 
76    At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
77    registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
78    numbers to indicate their contents.  During scan, when the code
79    copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
80    When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
81    quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
82    `REG_QTY (N)' records what quantity register N is currently thought
83    of as containing.
84 
85    All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to zero.
86    If register N has not been assigned a quantity, `REG_QTY (N)' will
87    equal -N - 1, which is always negative.
88 
89    Quantity numbers below zero do not exist and none of the `qty_table'
90    entries should be referenced with a negative index.
91 
92    We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
93    quantity number.  The `qty_table` members `first_reg' and `last_reg',
94    and `reg_eqv_table' members `next' and `prev' hold these chains.
95 
96    The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
97    Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
98    We replace any equivalent register with that one.
99 
100    If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
101    REG expressions with qty_table `mode' must be in the hash table for both
102    registers and must be in the same class.
103 
104    The converse is not true.  Since hard registers may be referenced in
105    any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
106    but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
107    of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
108 
109 Constants and quantity numbers
110 
111    When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
112    in the appropriate qty_table `const_rtx'.  This is in addition to
113    putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
114 
115    Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
116    macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value.  In any
117    event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
118 
119    When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
120    of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate qty_table
121    `const_rtx'.
122 
123    Integer constants don't have a machine mode.  However, cse
124    determines the intended machine mode from the destination
125    of the instruction that moves the constant.  The machine mode
126    is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
127    constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
128 
129 Other expressions:
130 
131    To record known equivalences among expressions in general
132    we use a hash table called `table'.  It has a fixed number of buckets
133    that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
134    These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
135    hash codes.
136 
137    Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
138    currently have equivalent values.
139 
140    Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
141    the expression.  This is done using `reg_qty' and qty_table `first_reg'.
142    The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
143    number, not the register number.
144 
145    When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
146    hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
147    could be different as a result.
148 
149      1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
150      ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed.  That is because
151      nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
152      The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
153 
154      The special cases are when the address is constant or is
155      a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
156      or a static chain pointer.  When such addresses are stored in,
157      we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
158      due to overlap.  `invalidate' does this.
159      All expressions that refer to non-constant
160      memory addresses are also invalidated.  `invalidate_memory' does this.
161 
162      2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
163      containing references to that register, and only those,
164      must be removed.
165 
166    Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
167    a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
168    Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
169    entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
170    changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
171    the register's new value.  This sequence of circumstances is rare
172    within any one basic block.
173 
174    `REG_TICK' and `REG_IN_TABLE', accessors for members of
175    cse_reg_info, are used to detect this case.  REG_TICK (i) is
176    incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
177    REG_IN_TABLE (i) holds -1 if no references to register i have been
178    entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value REG_TICK (i)
179    had when the references were entered.  If we want to enter a
180    reference and REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i), we must scan and
181    remove old references.  Until we want to enter a new entry, the
182    mere fact that the two vectors don't match makes the entries be
183    ignored if anyone tries to match them.
184 
185    Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
186    the equivalent-register chains.  However, `REG_TICK' and
187    `REG_IN_TABLE' do not apply to expressions which are simple
188    register references.  These expressions are removed from the table
189    immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
190    we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
191    the register.
192 
193    A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
194    reuse.  A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
195    invalidates everything that resides in memory.
196 
197 Related expressions:
198 
199    Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
200    are called related.  When a constant expression is put in
201    the table, the related expression with no constant term
202    is also entered.  These are made to point at each other
203    so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
204    register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression.  */
205 
206 /* Length of qty_table vector.  We know in advance we will not need
207    a quantity number this big.  */
208 
209 static int max_qty;
210 
211 /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
212    This is 1 + the largest number needed so far.  */
213 
214 static int next_qty;
215 
216 /* Per-qty information tracking.
217 
218    `first_reg' and `last_reg' track the head and tail of the
219    chain of registers which currently contain this quantity.
220 
221    `mode' contains the machine mode of this quantity.
222 
223    `const_rtx' holds the rtx of the constant value of this
224    quantity, if known.  A summations of the frame/arg pointer
225    and a constant can also be entered here.  When this holds
226    a known value, `const_insn' is the insn which stored the
227    constant value.
228 
229    `comparison_{code,const,qty}' are used to track when a
230    comparison between a quantity and some constant or register has
231    been passed.  In such a case, we know the results of the comparison
232    in case we see it again.  These members record a comparison that
233    is known to be true.  `comparison_code' holds the rtx code of such
234    a comparison, else it is set to UNKNOWN and the other two
235    comparison members are undefined.  `comparison_const' holds
236    the constant being compared against, or zero if the comparison
237    is not against a constant.  `comparison_qty' holds the quantity
238    being compared against when the result is known.  If the comparison
239    is not with a register, `comparison_qty' is -1.  */
240 
241 struct qty_table_elem
242 {
243   rtx const_rtx;
244   rtx_insn *const_insn;
245   rtx comparison_const;
246   int comparison_qty;
247   unsigned int first_reg, last_reg;
248   /* The sizes of these fields should match the sizes of the
249      code and mode fields of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
250   ENUM_BITFIELD(rtx_code) comparison_code : 16;
251   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
252 };
253 
254 /* The table of all qtys, indexed by qty number.  */
255 static struct qty_table_elem *qty_table;
256 
257 /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
258    table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
259    its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
260 
261    Instead, we store below the current and last value assigned to CC0.
262    If it should happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference
263    to the actual assigned value.  In case it is a constant, we store
264    the mode in which the constant should be interpreted.  */
265 
266 static rtx this_insn_cc0, prev_insn_cc0;
267 static machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode, prev_insn_cc0_mode;
268 
269 /* Insn being scanned.  */
270 
271 static rtx_insn *this_insn;
272 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
273 
274 /* Index by register number, gives the number of the next (or
275    previous) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
276    value.
277 
278    Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
279 
280    If REG_QTY (N) == -N - 1, reg_eqv_table[N].next is undefined.  */
281 
282 /* Per-register equivalence chain.  */
283 struct reg_eqv_elem
284 {
285   int next, prev;
286 };
287 
288 /* The table of all register equivalence chains.  */
289 static struct reg_eqv_elem *reg_eqv_table;
290 
291 struct cse_reg_info
292 {
293   /* The timestamp at which this register is initialized.  */
294   unsigned int timestamp;
295 
296   /* The quantity number of the register's current contents.  */
297   int reg_qty;
298 
299   /* The number of times the register has been altered in the current
300      basic block.  */
301   int reg_tick;
302 
303   /* The REG_TICK value at which rtx's containing this register are
304      valid in the hash table.  If this does not equal the current
305      reg_tick value, such expressions existing in the hash table are
306      invalid.  */
307   int reg_in_table;
308 
309   /* The SUBREG that was set when REG_TICK was last incremented.  Set
310      to -1 if the last store was to the whole register, not a subreg.  */
311   unsigned int subreg_ticked;
312 };
313 
314 /* A table of cse_reg_info indexed by register numbers.  */
315 static struct cse_reg_info *cse_reg_info_table;
316 
317 /* The size of the above table.  */
318 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_size;
319 
320 /* The index of the first entry that has not been initialized.  */
321 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized;
322 
323 /* The timestamp at the beginning of the current run of
324    cse_extended_basic_block.  We increment this variable at the beginning of
325    the current run of cse_extended_basic_block.  The timestamp field of a
326    cse_reg_info entry matches the value of this variable if and only
327    if the entry has been initialized during the current run of
328    cse_extended_basic_block.  */
329 static unsigned int cse_reg_info_timestamp;
330 
331 /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
332    currently a REG expression in the hash table.  Note the difference
333    from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
334    expression in the table.  */
335 
336 static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
337 
338 /* True if CSE has altered the CFG.  */
339 static bool cse_cfg_altered;
340 
341 /* True if CSE has altered conditional jump insns in such a way
342    that jump optimization should be redone.  */
343 static bool cse_jumps_altered;
344 
345 /* True if we put a LABEL_REF into the hash table for an INSN
346    without a REG_LABEL_OPERAND, we have to rerun jump after CSE
347    to put in the note.  */
348 static bool recorded_label_ref;
349 
350 /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
351    if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
352    subexpression.  */
353 
354 static int do_not_record;
355 
356 /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
357    if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed.  */
358 
359 static int hash_arg_in_memory;
360 
361 /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
362    each recording one expression's information.
363    That expression is in the `exp' field.
364 
365    The canon_exp field contains a canonical (from the point of view of
366    alias analysis) version of the `exp' field.
367 
368    Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
369    through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
370 
371    Each set of expressions with equivalent values
372    are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
373    and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
374    the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
375    that chain.  The chain is in order of increasing cost.
376    Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
377 
378    The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
379    involve any reference to memory.  These elements are removed
380    whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
381    To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
382    the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
383    the frame pointer or argument pointer.
384 
385    The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
386    (that differ by adding an integer).
387    The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
388    `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
389    chain is not useful.
390 
391    The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
392    The `regcost' field stores the value returned by approx_reg_cost for
393    this element's expression.
394 
395    The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
396    a fixed address).
397 
398    The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
399 
400    The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
401    if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
402    field is the mode it was being used as.  Each constant is
403    recorded separately for each mode it is used with.  */
404 
405 struct table_elt
406 {
407   rtx exp;
408   rtx canon_exp;
409   struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
410   struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
411   struct table_elt *next_same_value;
412   struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
413   struct table_elt *first_same_value;
414   struct table_elt *related_value;
415   int cost;
416   int regcost;
417   /* The size of this field should match the size
418      of the mode field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
419   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
420   char in_memory;
421   char is_const;
422   char flag;
423 };
424 
425 /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
426    things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
427    down a lot of loops that happen frequently.  */
428 #define HASH_SHIFT  5
429 #define HASH_SIZE   (1 << HASH_SHIFT)
430 #define HASH_MASK   (HASH_SIZE - 1)
431 
432 /* Compute hash code of X in mode M.  Special-case case where X is a pseudo
433    register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set).  */
434 
435 #define HASH(X, M)  \
436  ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER          \
437   ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X)))          \
438   : canon_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
439 
440 /* Like HASH, but without side-effects.  */
441 #define SAFE_HASH(X, M)       \
442  ((REG_P (X) && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER          \
443   ? (((unsigned) REG << 7) + (unsigned) REG_QTY (REGNO (X)))          \
444   : safe_hash (X, M)) & HASH_MASK)
445 
446 /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for the
447    purpose of approximating register costs.
448    It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
449    non-fixed hard regs.
450    A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed.  */
451 #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
452   ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || (N) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM \
453    || fixed_regs[N] || global_regs[N])
454 
455 /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt.  Fixed
456    hard registers and pointers into the frame are the cheapest with a cost
457    of 0.  Next come pseudos with a cost of one and other hard registers with
458    a cost of 2.  Aside from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'.  */
459 
460 #define CHEAP_REGNO(N)                                                                    \
461   (REGNO_PTR_FRAME_P (N)                                                        \
462    || (HARD_REGISTER_NUM_P (N)                                                            \
463        && FIXED_REGNO_P (N) && REGNO_REG_CLASS (N) != NO_REGS))
464 
465 #define COST(X, MODE)                                                                     \
466   (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, SET, 1))
467 #define COST_IN(X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO)                                           \
468   (REG_P (X) ? 0 : notreg_cost (X, MODE, OUTER, OPNO))
469 
470 /* Get the number of times this register has been updated in this
471    basic block.  */
472 
473 #define REG_TICK(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_tick)
474 
475 /* Get the point at which REG was recorded in the table.  */
476 
477 #define REG_IN_TABLE(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_in_table)
478 
479 /* Get the SUBREG set at the last increment to REG_TICK (-1 if not a
480    SUBREG).  */
481 
482 #define SUBREG_TICKED(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->subreg_ticked)
483 
484 /* Get the quantity number for REG.  */
485 
486 #define REG_QTY(N) (get_cse_reg_info (N)->reg_qty)
487 
488 /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
489    into the qty_table.  */
490 
491 #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (REG_QTY (N) >= 0)
492 
493 /* Compare table_elt X and Y and return true iff X is cheaper than Y.  */
494 
495 #define CHEAPER(X, Y) \
496  (preferable ((X)->cost, (X)->regcost, (Y)->cost, (Y)->regcost) < 0)
497 
498 static struct table_elt *table[HASH_SIZE];
499 
500 /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
501    but currently removed from the table.  */
502 
503 static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
504 
505 /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
506    symbolic constant.  If this was found, it means we should try to
507    convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
508    the insn.  */
509 
510 static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
511 static int constant_pool_entries_regcost;
512 
513 /* Trace a patch through the CFG.  */
514 
515 struct branch_path
516 {
517   /* The basic block for this path entry.  */
518   basic_block bb;
519 };
520 
521 /* This data describes a block that will be processed by
522    cse_extended_basic_block.  */
523 
524 struct cse_basic_block_data
525 {
526   /* Total number of SETs in block.  */
527   int nsets;
528   /* Size of current branch path, if any.  */
529   int path_size;
530   /* Current path, indicating which basic_blocks will be processed.  */
531   struct branch_path *path;
532 };
533 
534 
535 /* Pointers to the live in/live out bitmaps for the boundaries of the
536    current EBB.  */
537 static bitmap cse_ebb_live_in, cse_ebb_live_out;
538 
539 /* A simple bitmap to track which basic blocks have been visited
540    already as part of an already processed extended basic block.  */
541 static sbitmap cse_visited_basic_blocks;
542 
543 static bool fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x);
544 static int notreg_cost (rtx, machine_mode, enum rtx_code, int);
545 static int preferable (int, int, int, int);
546 static void new_basic_block (void);
547 static void make_new_qty (unsigned int, machine_mode);
548 static void make_regs_eqv (unsigned int, unsigned int);
549 static void delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int);
550 static int mention_regs (rtx);
551 static int insert_regs (rtx, struct table_elt *, int);
552 static void remove_from_table (struct table_elt *, unsigned);
553 static void remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx, unsigned);
554 static struct table_elt *lookup (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
555 static struct table_elt *lookup_for_remove (rtx, unsigned, machine_mode);
556 static rtx lookup_as_function (rtx, enum rtx_code);
557 static struct table_elt *insert_with_costs (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
558                                                       machine_mode, int, int);
559 static struct table_elt *insert (rtx, struct table_elt *, unsigned,
560                                          machine_mode);
561 static void merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *, struct table_elt *);
562 static void invalidate (rtx, machine_mode);
563 static void remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int);
564 static void remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int, poly_uint64,
565                                                   machine_mode);
566 static void rehash_using_reg (rtx);
567 static void invalidate_memory (void);
568 static void invalidate_for_call (void);
569 static rtx use_related_value (rtx, struct table_elt *);
570 
571 static inline unsigned canon_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
572 static inline unsigned safe_hash (rtx, machine_mode);
573 static inline unsigned hash_rtx_string (const char *);
574 
575 static rtx canon_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *);
576 static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *,
577                                                      machine_mode *,
578                                                      machine_mode *);
579 static rtx fold_rtx (rtx, rtx_insn *);
580 static rtx equiv_constant (rtx);
581 static void record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *, bool);
582 static void record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, rtx,
583                                     int);
584 static void cse_insn (rtx_insn *);
585 static void cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
586 static void invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
587 static void invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *);
588 static rtx cse_process_notes (rtx, rtx, bool *);
589 static void cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *);
590 extern void dump_class (struct table_elt*);
591 static void get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno);
592 static struct cse_reg_info * get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno);
593 
594 static void flush_hash_table (void);
595 static bool insn_live_p (rtx_insn *, int *);
596 static bool set_live_p (rtx, rtx_insn *, int *);
597 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *, rtx);
598 static void cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx);
599 static machine_mode cse_cc_succs (basic_block, basic_block, rtx, rtx,
600                                                bool);
601 
602 
603 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
604 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART           gen_lowpart_if_possible
605 
606 static const struct rtl_hooks cse_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
607 
608 /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer).  */
609 
610 static bool
fixed_base_plus_p(rtx x)611 fixed_base_plus_p (rtx x)
612 {
613   switch (GET_CODE (x))
614     {
615     case REG:
616       if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx)
617           return true;
618       if (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM])
619           return true;
620       return false;
621 
622     case PLUS:
623       if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
624           return false;
625       return fixed_base_plus_p (XEXP (x, 0));
626 
627     default:
628       return false;
629     }
630 }
631 
632 /* Dump the expressions in the equivalence class indicated by CLASSP.
633    This function is used only for debugging.  */
634 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
dump_class(struct table_elt * classp)635 dump_class (struct table_elt *classp)
636 {
637   struct table_elt *elt;
638 
639   fprintf (stderr, "Equivalence chain for ");
640   print_rtl (stderr, classp->exp);
641   fprintf (stderr, ": \n");
642 
643   for (elt = classp->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
644     {
645       print_rtl (stderr, elt->exp);
646       fprintf (stderr, "\n");
647     }
648 }
649 
650 /* Return an estimate of the cost of the registers used in an rtx.
651    This is mostly the number of different REG expressions in the rtx;
652    however for some exceptions like fixed registers we use a cost of
653    0.  If any other hard register reference occurs, return MAX_COST.  */
654 
655 static int
approx_reg_cost(const_rtx x)656 approx_reg_cost (const_rtx x)
657 {
658   int cost = 0;
659   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
660   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
661     {
662       const_rtx x = *iter;
663       if (REG_P (x))
664           {
665             unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
666             if (!CHEAP_REGNO (regno))
667               {
668                 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
669                     {
670                       if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
671                         return MAX_COST;
672                       cost += 2;
673                     }
674                 else
675                     cost += 1;
676               }
677           }
678     }
679   return cost;
680 }
681 
682 /* Return a negative value if an rtx A, whose costs are given by COST_A
683    and REGCOST_A, is more desirable than an rtx B.
684    Return a positive value if A is less desirable, or 0 if the two are
685    equally good.  */
686 static int
preferable(int cost_a,int regcost_a,int cost_b,int regcost_b)687 preferable (int cost_a, int regcost_a, int cost_b, int regcost_b)
688 {
689   /* First, get rid of cases involving expressions that are entirely
690      unwanted.  */
691   if (cost_a != cost_b)
692     {
693       if (cost_a == MAX_COST)
694           return 1;
695       if (cost_b == MAX_COST)
696           return -1;
697     }
698 
699   /* Avoid extending lifetimes of hardregs.  */
700   if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
701     {
702       if (regcost_a == MAX_COST)
703           return 1;
704       if (regcost_b == MAX_COST)
705           return -1;
706     }
707 
708   /* Normal operation costs take precedence.  */
709   if (cost_a != cost_b)
710     return cost_a - cost_b;
711   /* Only if these are identical consider effects on register pressure.  */
712   if (regcost_a != regcost_b)
713     return regcost_a - regcost_b;
714   return 0;
715 }
716 
717 /* Internal function, to compute cost when X is not a register; called
718    from COST macro to keep it simple.  */
719 
720 static int
notreg_cost(rtx x,machine_mode mode,enum rtx_code outer,int opno)721 notreg_cost (rtx x, machine_mode mode, enum rtx_code outer, int opno)
722 {
723   scalar_int_mode int_mode, inner_mode;
724   return ((GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
725              && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
726              && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
727              && is_int_mode (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), &inner_mode)
728              && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
729              && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
730              && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (int_mode, inner_mode))
731             ? 0
732             : rtx_cost (x, mode, outer, opno, optimize_this_for_speed_p) * 2);
733 }
734 
735 
736 /* Initialize CSE_REG_INFO_TABLE.  */
737 
738 static void
init_cse_reg_info(unsigned int nregs)739 init_cse_reg_info (unsigned int nregs)
740 {
741   /* Do we need to grow the table?  */
742   if (nregs > cse_reg_info_table_size)
743     {
744       unsigned int new_size;
745 
746       if (cse_reg_info_table_size < 2048)
747           {
748             /* Compute a new size that is a power of 2 and no smaller
749                than the large of NREGS and 64.  */
750             new_size = (cse_reg_info_table_size
751                           ? cse_reg_info_table_size : 64);
752 
753             while (new_size < nregs)
754               new_size *= 2;
755           }
756       else
757           {
758             /* If we need a big table, allocate just enough to hold
759                NREGS registers.  */
760             new_size = nregs;
761           }
762 
763       /* Reallocate the table with NEW_SIZE entries.  */
764       free (cse_reg_info_table);
765       cse_reg_info_table = XNEWVEC (struct cse_reg_info, new_size);
766       cse_reg_info_table_size = new_size;
767       cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = 0;
768     }
769 
770   /* Do we have all of the first NREGS entries initialized?  */
771   if (cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized < nregs)
772     {
773       unsigned int old_timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp - 1;
774       unsigned int i;
775 
776       /* Put the old timestamp on newly allocated entries so that they
777            will all be considered out of date.  We do not touch those
778            entries beyond the first NREGS entries to be nice to the
779            virtual memory.  */
780       for (i = cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized; i < nregs; i++)
781           cse_reg_info_table[i].timestamp = old_timestamp;
782 
783       cse_reg_info_table_first_uninitialized = nregs;
784     }
785 }
786 
787 /* Given REGNO, initialize the cse_reg_info entry for REGNO.  */
788 
789 static void
get_cse_reg_info_1(unsigned int regno)790 get_cse_reg_info_1 (unsigned int regno)
791 {
792   /* Set TIMESTAMP field to CSE_REG_INFO_TIMESTAMP so that this
793      entry will be considered to have been initialized.  */
794   cse_reg_info_table[regno].timestamp = cse_reg_info_timestamp;
795 
796   /* Initialize the rest of the entry.  */
797   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_tick = 1;
798   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_in_table = -1;
799   cse_reg_info_table[regno].subreg_ticked = -1;
800   cse_reg_info_table[regno].reg_qty = -regno - 1;
801 }
802 
803 /* Find a cse_reg_info entry for REGNO.  */
804 
805 static inline struct cse_reg_info *
get_cse_reg_info(unsigned int regno)806 get_cse_reg_info (unsigned int regno)
807 {
808   struct cse_reg_info *p = &cse_reg_info_table[regno];
809 
810   /* If this entry has not been initialized, go ahead and initialize
811      it.  */
812   if (p->timestamp != cse_reg_info_timestamp)
813     get_cse_reg_info_1 (regno);
814 
815   return p;
816 }
817 
818 /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
819    for a new basic block.  */
820 
821 static void
new_basic_block(void)822 new_basic_block (void)
823 {
824   int i;
825 
826   next_qty = 0;
827 
828   /* Invalidate cse_reg_info_table.  */
829   cse_reg_info_timestamp++;
830 
831   /* Clear out hash table state for this pass.  */
832   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
833 
834   /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
835      much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'.  */
836 
837   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
838     {
839       struct table_elt *first;
840 
841       first = table[i];
842       if (first != NULL)
843           {
844             struct table_elt *last = first;
845 
846             table[i] = NULL;
847 
848             while (last->next_same_hash != NULL)
849               last = last->next_same_hash;
850 
851             /* Now relink this hash entire chain into
852                the free element list.  */
853 
854             last->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
855             free_element_chain = first;
856           }
857     }
858 
859   prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
860 }
861 
862 /* Say that register REG contains a quantity in mode MODE not in any
863    register before and initialize that quantity.  */
864 
865 static void
make_new_qty(unsigned int reg,machine_mode mode)866 make_new_qty (unsigned int reg, machine_mode mode)
867 {
868   int q;
869   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
870   struct reg_eqv_elem *eqv;
871 
872   gcc_assert (next_qty < max_qty);
873 
874   q = REG_QTY (reg) = next_qty++;
875   ent = &qty_table[q];
876   ent->first_reg = reg;
877   ent->last_reg = reg;
878   ent->mode = mode;
879   ent->const_rtx = ent->const_insn = NULL;
880   ent->comparison_code = UNKNOWN;
881 
882   eqv = &reg_eqv_table[reg];
883   eqv->next = eqv->prev = -1;
884 }
885 
886 /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
887    OLD is not changing; NEW is.  */
888 
889 static void
make_regs_eqv(unsigned int new_reg,unsigned int old_reg)890 make_regs_eqv (unsigned int new_reg, unsigned int old_reg)
891 {
892   unsigned int lastr, firstr;
893   int q = REG_QTY (old_reg);
894   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
895 
896   ent = &qty_table[q];
897 
898   /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number.  */
899   gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old_reg));
900 
901   REG_QTY (new_reg) = q;
902   firstr = ent->first_reg;
903   lastr = ent->last_reg;
904 
905   /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything.  Prefer pseudo regs to other
906      hard regs.  Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
907      of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
908      make it the new canonical replacement for this qty.  */
909   if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
910       /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS.  This means
911            that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
912            they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
913            either.  */
914       && (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new_reg) != NO_REGS)
915       && ((new_reg < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new_reg))
916             || (new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
917                 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
918                       || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, new_reg)
919                           && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_out, firstr))
920                       || (bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, new_reg)
921                           && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_ebb_live_in, firstr))))))
922     {
923       reg_eqv_table[firstr].prev = new_reg;
924       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = firstr;
925       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = -1;
926       ent->first_reg = new_reg;
927     }
928   else
929     {
930       /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
931            Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
932            end.  Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
933            equivalent for anything.  */
934       while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev >= 0
935                && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
936                && new_reg >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
937           lastr = reg_eqv_table[lastr].prev;
938       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].next = reg_eqv_table[lastr].next;
939       if (reg_eqv_table[lastr].next >= 0)
940           reg_eqv_table[reg_eqv_table[lastr].next].prev = new_reg;
941       else
942           qty_table[q].last_reg = new_reg;
943       reg_eqv_table[lastr].next = new_reg;
944       reg_eqv_table[new_reg].prev = lastr;
945     }
946 }
947 
948 /* Remove REG from its equivalence class.  */
949 
950 static void
delete_reg_equiv(unsigned int reg)951 delete_reg_equiv (unsigned int reg)
952 {
953   struct qty_table_elem *ent;
954   int q = REG_QTY (reg);
955   int p, n;
956 
957   /* If invalid, do nothing.  */
958   if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (reg))
959     return;
960 
961   ent = &qty_table[q];
962 
963   p = reg_eqv_table[reg].prev;
964   n = reg_eqv_table[reg].next;
965 
966   if (n != -1)
967     reg_eqv_table[n].prev = p;
968   else
969     ent->last_reg = p;
970   if (p != -1)
971     reg_eqv_table[p].next = n;
972   else
973     ent->first_reg = n;
974 
975   REG_QTY (reg) = -reg - 1;
976 }
977 
978 /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
979    that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
980 
981    Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
982    as subexpressions will be considered valid.
983 
984    mention_regs is not called when a register itself
985    is being stored in the table.
986 
987    Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
988    of X.  */
989 
990 static int
mention_regs(rtx x)991 mention_regs (rtx x)
992 {
993   enum rtx_code code;
994   int i, j;
995   const char *fmt;
996   int changed = 0;
997 
998   if (x == 0)
999     return 0;
1000 
1001   code = GET_CODE (x);
1002   if (code == REG)
1003     {
1004       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1005       unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
1006       unsigned int i;
1007 
1008       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1009           {
1010             if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
1011               remove_invalid_refs (i);
1012 
1013             REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
1014             SUBREG_TICKED (i) = -1;
1015           }
1016 
1017       return 0;
1018     }
1019 
1020   /* If this is a SUBREG, we don't want to discard other SUBREGs of the same
1021      pseudo if they don't use overlapping words.  We handle only pseudos
1022      here for simplicity.  */
1023   if (code == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
1024       && REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1025     {
1026       unsigned int i = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
1027 
1028       if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0 && REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
1029           {
1030             /* If REG_IN_TABLE (i) differs from REG_TICK (i) by one, and
1031                the last store to this register really stored into this
1032                subreg, then remove the memory of this subreg.
1033                Otherwise, remove any memory of the entire register and
1034                all its subregs from the table.  */
1035             if (REG_TICK (i) - REG_IN_TABLE (i) > 1
1036                 || SUBREG_TICKED (i) != REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)))
1037               remove_invalid_refs (i);
1038             else
1039               remove_invalid_subreg_refs (i, SUBREG_BYTE (x), GET_MODE (x));
1040           }
1041 
1042       REG_IN_TABLE (i) = REG_TICK (i);
1043       SUBREG_TICKED (i) = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
1044       return 0;
1045     }
1046 
1047   /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
1048      that does not have a quantity, give it one.  This is so that a later
1049      call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
1050      hash code and not found in the table after that call.
1051 
1052      It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
1053      fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
1054      call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
1055      use of the register is in the comparison.  */
1056 
1057   if (code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
1058     {
1059       if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
1060             && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
1061           if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), NULL, 0))
1062             {
1063               rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
1064               changed = 1;
1065             }
1066 
1067       if (REG_P (XEXP (x, 1))
1068             && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
1069           if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), NULL, 0))
1070             {
1071               rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
1072               changed = 1;
1073             }
1074     }
1075 
1076   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1077   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
1078     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1079       changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
1080     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1081       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1082           changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
1083 
1084   return changed;
1085 }
1086 
1087 /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
1088    with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
1089    (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
1090    If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
1091    Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
1092    before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
1093 
1094    Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
1095    so X's hash code may be different.  */
1096 
1097 static int
insert_regs(rtx x,struct table_elt * classp,int modified)1098 insert_regs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, int modified)
1099 {
1100   if (REG_P (x))
1101     {
1102       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1103       int qty_valid;
1104 
1105       /* If REGNO is in the equivalence table already but is of the
1106            wrong mode for that equivalence, don't do anything here.  */
1107 
1108       qty_valid = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno);
1109       if (qty_valid)
1110           {
1111             struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[REG_QTY (regno)];
1112 
1113             if (ent->mode != GET_MODE (x))
1114               return 0;
1115           }
1116 
1117       if (modified || ! qty_valid)
1118           {
1119             if (classp)
1120               for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
1121                      classp != 0;
1122                      classp = classp->next_same_value)
1123                 if (REG_P (classp->exp)
1124                       && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
1125                     {
1126                       unsigned c_regno = REGNO (classp->exp);
1127 
1128                       gcc_assert (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (c_regno));
1129 
1130                       /* Suppose that 5 is hard reg and 100 and 101 are
1131                          pseudos.  Consider
1132 
1133                          (set (reg:si 100) (reg:si 5))
1134                          (set (reg:si 5) (reg:si 100))
1135                          (set (reg:di 101) (reg:di 5))
1136 
1137                          We would now set REG_QTY (101) = REG_QTY (5), but the
1138                          entry for 5 is in SImode.  When we use this later in
1139                          copy propagation, we get the register in wrong mode.  */
1140                       if (qty_table[REG_QTY (c_regno)].mode != GET_MODE (x))
1141                         continue;
1142 
1143                       make_regs_eqv (regno, c_regno);
1144                       return 1;
1145                     }
1146 
1147             /* Mention_regs for a SUBREG checks if REG_TICK is exactly one larger
1148                than REG_IN_TABLE to find out if there was only a single preceding
1149                invalidation - for the SUBREG - or another one, which would be
1150                for the full register.  However, if we find here that REG_TICK
1151                indicates that the register is invalid, it means that it has
1152                been invalidated in a separate operation.  The SUBREG might be used
1153                now (then this is a recursive call), or we might use the full REG
1154                now and a SUBREG of it later.  So bump up REG_TICK so that
1155                mention_regs will do the right thing.  */
1156             if (! modified
1157                 && REG_IN_TABLE (regno) >= 0
1158                 && REG_TICK (regno) == REG_IN_TABLE (regno) + 1)
1159               REG_TICK (regno)++;
1160             make_new_qty (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1161             return 1;
1162           }
1163 
1164       return 0;
1165     }
1166 
1167   /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
1168      table.  If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
1169      this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
1170      not be accessible because its hash code will have changed.  So assign
1171      a quantity number now.  */
1172 
1173   else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
1174              && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
1175     {
1176       insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), NULL, 0);
1177       mention_regs (x);
1178       return 1;
1179     }
1180   else
1181     return mention_regs (x);
1182 }
1183 
1184 
1185 /* Compute upper and lower anchors for CST.  Also compute the offset of CST
1186    from these anchors/bases such that *_BASE + *_OFFS = CST.  Return false iff
1187    CST is equal to an anchor.  */
1188 
1189 static bool
compute_const_anchors(rtx cst,HOST_WIDE_INT * lower_base,HOST_WIDE_INT * lower_offs,HOST_WIDE_INT * upper_base,HOST_WIDE_INT * upper_offs)1190 compute_const_anchors (rtx cst,
1191                            HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *lower_offs,
1192                            HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_base, HOST_WIDE_INT *upper_offs)
1193 {
1194   HOST_WIDE_INT n = INTVAL (cst);
1195 
1196   *lower_base = n & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
1197   if (*lower_base == n)
1198     return false;
1199 
1200   *upper_base =
1201     (n + (targetm.const_anchor - 1)) & ~(targetm.const_anchor - 1);
1202   *upper_offs = n - *upper_base;
1203   *lower_offs = n - *lower_base;
1204   return true;
1205 }
1206 
1207 /* Insert the equivalence between ANCHOR and (REG + OFF) in mode MODE.  */
1208 
1209 static void
insert_const_anchor(HOST_WIDE_INT anchor,rtx reg,HOST_WIDE_INT offs,machine_mode mode)1210 insert_const_anchor (HOST_WIDE_INT anchor, rtx reg, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
1211                          machine_mode mode)
1212 {
1213   struct table_elt *elt;
1214   unsigned hash;
1215   rtx anchor_exp;
1216   rtx exp;
1217 
1218   anchor_exp = GEN_INT (anchor);
1219   hash = HASH (anchor_exp, mode);
1220   elt = lookup (anchor_exp, hash, mode);
1221   if (!elt)
1222     elt = insert (anchor_exp, NULL, hash, mode);
1223 
1224   exp = plus_constant (mode, reg, offs);
1225   /* REG has just been inserted and the hash codes recomputed.  */
1226   mention_regs (exp);
1227   hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1228 
1229   /* Use the cost of the register rather than the whole expression.  When
1230      looking up constant anchors we will further offset the corresponding
1231      expression therefore it does not make sense to prefer REGs over
1232      reg-immediate additions.  Prefer instead the oldest expression.  Also
1233      don't prefer pseudos over hard regs so that we derive constants in
1234      argument registers from other argument registers rather than from the
1235      original pseudo that was used to synthesize the constant.  */
1236   insert_with_costs (exp, elt, hash, mode, COST (reg, mode), 1);
1237 }
1238 
1239 /* The constant CST is equivalent to the register REG.  Create
1240    equivalences between the two anchors of CST and the corresponding
1241    register-offset expressions using REG.  */
1242 
1243 static void
insert_const_anchors(rtx reg,rtx cst,machine_mode mode)1244 insert_const_anchors (rtx reg, rtx cst, machine_mode mode)
1245 {
1246   HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
1247 
1248   if (!compute_const_anchors (cst, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
1249                                     &upper_base, &upper_offs))
1250       return;
1251 
1252   /* Ignore anchors of value 0.  Constants accessible from zero are
1253      simple.  */
1254   if (lower_base != 0)
1255     insert_const_anchor (lower_base, reg, -lower_offs, mode);
1256 
1257   if (upper_base != 0)
1258     insert_const_anchor (upper_base, reg, -upper_offs, mode);
1259 }
1260 
1261 /* We need to express ANCHOR_ELT->exp + OFFS.  Walk the equivalence list of
1262    ANCHOR_ELT and see if offsetting any of the entries by OFFS would create a
1263    valid expression.  Return the cheapest and oldest of such expressions.  In
1264    *OLD, return how old the resulting expression is compared to the other
1265    equivalent expressions.  */
1266 
1267 static rtx
find_reg_offset_for_const(struct table_elt * anchor_elt,HOST_WIDE_INT offs,unsigned * old)1268 find_reg_offset_for_const (struct table_elt *anchor_elt, HOST_WIDE_INT offs,
1269                                  unsigned *old)
1270 {
1271   struct table_elt *elt;
1272   unsigned idx;
1273   struct table_elt *match_elt;
1274   rtx match;
1275 
1276   /* Find the cheapest and *oldest* expression to maximize the chance of
1277      reusing the same pseudo.  */
1278 
1279   match_elt = NULL;
1280   match = NULL_RTX;
1281   for (elt = anchor_elt->first_same_value, idx = 0;
1282        elt;
1283        elt = elt->next_same_value, idx++)
1284     {
1285       if (match_elt && CHEAPER (match_elt, elt))
1286           return match;
1287 
1288       if (REG_P (elt->exp)
1289             || (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == PLUS
1290                 && REG_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))
1291                 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == CONST_INT))
1292           {
1293             rtx x;
1294 
1295             /* Ignore expressions that are no longer valid.  */
1296             if (!REG_P (elt->exp) && !exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
1297               continue;
1298 
1299             x = plus_constant (GET_MODE (elt->exp), elt->exp, offs);
1300             if (REG_P (x)
1301                 || (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
1302                       && IN_RANGE (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)),
1303                                      -targetm.const_anchor,
1304                                      targetm.const_anchor - 1)))
1305               {
1306                 match = x;
1307                 match_elt = elt;
1308                 *old = idx;
1309               }
1310           }
1311     }
1312 
1313   return match;
1314 }
1315 
1316 /* Try to express the constant SRC_CONST using a register+offset expression
1317    derived from a constant anchor.  Return it if successful or NULL_RTX,
1318    otherwise.  */
1319 
1320 static rtx
try_const_anchors(rtx src_const,machine_mode mode)1321 try_const_anchors (rtx src_const, machine_mode mode)
1322 {
1323   struct table_elt *lower_elt, *upper_elt;
1324   HOST_WIDE_INT lower_base, lower_offs, upper_base, upper_offs;
1325   rtx lower_anchor_rtx, upper_anchor_rtx;
1326   rtx lower_exp = NULL_RTX, upper_exp = NULL_RTX;
1327   unsigned lower_old, upper_old;
1328 
1329   /* CONST_INT is used for CC modes, but we should leave those alone.  */
1330   if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
1331     return NULL_RTX;
1332 
1333   gcc_assert (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode));
1334   if (!compute_const_anchors (src_const, &lower_base, &lower_offs,
1335                                     &upper_base, &upper_offs))
1336     return NULL_RTX;
1337 
1338   lower_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (lower_base);
1339   upper_anchor_rtx = GEN_INT (upper_base);
1340   lower_elt = lookup (lower_anchor_rtx, HASH (lower_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
1341   upper_elt = lookup (upper_anchor_rtx, HASH (upper_anchor_rtx, mode), mode);
1342 
1343   if (lower_elt)
1344     lower_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (lower_elt, lower_offs, &lower_old);
1345   if (upper_elt)
1346     upper_exp = find_reg_offset_for_const (upper_elt, upper_offs, &upper_old);
1347 
1348   if (!lower_exp)
1349     return upper_exp;
1350   if (!upper_exp)
1351     return lower_exp;
1352 
1353   /* Return the older expression.  */
1354   return (upper_old > lower_old ? upper_exp : lower_exp);
1355 }
1356 
1357 /* Look in or update the hash table.  */
1358 
1359 /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
1360    HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
1361    It's an argument because often that is known in advance
1362    and we save much time not recomputing it.  */
1363 
1364 static void
remove_from_table(struct table_elt * elt,unsigned int hash)1365 remove_from_table (struct table_elt *elt, unsigned int hash)
1366 {
1367   if (elt == 0)
1368     return;
1369 
1370   /* Mark this element as removed.  See cse_insn.  */
1371   elt->first_same_value = 0;
1372 
1373   /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class.  */
1374 
1375   {
1376     struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
1377     struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
1378 
1379     if (next)
1380       next->prev_same_value = prev;
1381 
1382     if (prev)
1383       prev->next_same_value = next;
1384     else
1385       {
1386           struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1387           while (next)
1388             {
1389               next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1390               next = next->next_same_value;
1391             }
1392       }
1393   }
1394 
1395   /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket.  */
1396 
1397   {
1398     struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1399     struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1400 
1401     if (next)
1402       next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1403 
1404     if (prev)
1405       prev->next_same_hash = next;
1406     else if (table[hash] == elt)
1407       table[hash] = next;
1408     else
1409       {
1410           /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket.  This can happen
1411              when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'.  Search
1412              for the hash bucket that it heads.  This happens only very
1413              rarely, so the cost is acceptable.  */
1414           for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
1415             if (table[hash] == elt)
1416               table[hash] = next;
1417       }
1418   }
1419 
1420   /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain.  */
1421 
1422   if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1423     {
1424       struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1425 
1426       while (p->related_value != elt)
1427           p = p->related_value;
1428       p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1429       if (p->related_value == p)
1430           p->related_value = 0;
1431     }
1432 
1433   /* Now add it to the free element chain.  */
1434   elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
1435   free_element_chain = elt;
1436 }
1437 
1438 /* Same as above, but X is a pseudo-register.  */
1439 
1440 static void
remove_pseudo_from_table(rtx x,unsigned int hash)1441 remove_pseudo_from_table (rtx x, unsigned int hash)
1442 {
1443   struct table_elt *elt;
1444 
1445   /* Because a pseudo-register can be referenced in more than one
1446      mode, we might have to remove more than one table entry.  */
1447   while ((elt = lookup_for_remove (x, hash, VOIDmode)))
1448     remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1449 }
1450 
1451 /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1452    or 0 if X is not in the table.
1453 
1454    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1455    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1456 
1457    Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1458    looks like X.  */
1459 
1460 static struct table_elt *
lookup(rtx x,unsigned int hash,machine_mode mode)1461 lookup (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
1462 {
1463   struct table_elt *p;
1464 
1465   for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1466     if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && REG_P (x))
1467                                   || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, !REG_P (x), false)))
1468       return p;
1469 
1470   return 0;
1471 }
1472 
1473 /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1474    Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register.  */
1475 
1476 static struct table_elt *
lookup_for_remove(rtx x,unsigned int hash,machine_mode mode)1477 lookup_for_remove (rtx x, unsigned int hash, machine_mode mode)
1478 {
1479   struct table_elt *p;
1480 
1481   if (REG_P (x))
1482     {
1483       unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1484 
1485       /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1486            invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0).  */
1487       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1488           if (REG_P (p->exp)
1489               && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1490             return p;
1491     }
1492   else
1493     {
1494       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1495           if (mode == p->mode
1496               && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, false)))
1497             return p;
1498     }
1499 
1500   return 0;
1501 }
1502 
1503 /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1504    If one is found, return that expression.  */
1505 
1506 static rtx
lookup_as_function(rtx x,enum rtx_code code)1507 lookup_as_function (rtx x, enum rtx_code code)
1508 {
1509   struct table_elt *p
1510     = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, VOIDmode), GET_MODE (x));
1511 
1512   if (p == 0)
1513     return 0;
1514 
1515   for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1516     if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1517           /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table.  */
1518           && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
1519       return p->exp;
1520 
1521   return 0;
1522 }
1523 
1524 /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code and
1525    CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in (or 0 if a new
1526    class should be made).  COST is the code of X and reg_cost is the
1527    cost of registers in X.  It is inserted at the proper position to
1528    keep the class in the order cheapest first.
1529 
1530    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1531    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1532 
1533    For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1534    goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1535    remains first unless a cheaper element is added.  The order of
1536    pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
1537    find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
1538 
1539    The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1540    The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1541 
1542    You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1543    and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1544    you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1545 
1546    If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities.  */
1547 
1548 static struct table_elt *
insert_with_costs(rtx x,struct table_elt * classp,unsigned int hash,machine_mode mode,int cost,int reg_cost)1549 insert_with_costs (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
1550                        machine_mode mode, int cost, int reg_cost)
1551 {
1552   struct table_elt *elt;
1553 
1554   /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1555      something is wrong.  */
1556   gcc_assert (!REG_P (x) || REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)));
1557 
1558   /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table.  */
1559   if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1560     add_to_hard_reg_set (&hard_regs_in_table, GET_MODE (x), REGNO (x));
1561 
1562   /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket.  */
1563 
1564   elt = free_element_chain;
1565   if (elt)
1566     free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
1567   else
1568     elt = XNEW (struct table_elt);
1569 
1570   elt->exp = x;
1571   elt->canon_exp = NULL_RTX;
1572   elt->cost = cost;
1573   elt->regcost = reg_cost;
1574   elt->next_same_value = 0;
1575   elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1576   elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1577   elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1578   elt->related_value = 0;
1579   elt->in_memory = 0;
1580   elt->mode = mode;
1581   elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x) || fixed_base_plus_p (x));
1582 
1583   if (table[hash])
1584     table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1585   table[hash] = elt;
1586 
1587   /* Put it into the proper value-class.  */
1588   if (classp)
1589     {
1590       classp = classp->first_same_value;
1591       if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1592           /* Insert at the head of the class.  */
1593           {
1594             struct table_elt *p;
1595             elt->next_same_value = classp;
1596             classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1597             elt->first_same_value = elt;
1598 
1599             for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1600               p->first_same_value = elt;
1601           }
1602       else
1603           {
1604             /* Insert not at head of the class.  */
1605             /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X.  */
1606             struct table_elt *p, *next;
1607 
1608             for (p = classp;
1609                  (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1610                  p = next)
1611               ;
1612 
1613             /* Put it after P and before NEXT.  */
1614             elt->next_same_value = next;
1615             if (next)
1616               next->prev_same_value = elt;
1617 
1618             elt->prev_same_value = p;
1619             p->next_same_value = elt;
1620             elt->first_same_value = classp;
1621           }
1622     }
1623   else
1624     elt->first_same_value = elt;
1625 
1626   /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1627      being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1628 
1629      If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1630      and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register.  So
1631      we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1632      inserted).
1633 
1634      If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1635      constant, we must check the entire class.
1636 
1637      If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1638      update the qtys `const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1639      insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant.  */
1640 
1641   if (elt->is_const && classp && REG_P (classp->exp)
1642       && !REG_P (x))
1643     {
1644       int exp_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (classp->exp));
1645       struct qty_table_elem *exp_ent = &qty_table[exp_q];
1646 
1647       exp_ent->const_rtx = gen_lowpart (exp_ent->mode, x);
1648       exp_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
1649     }
1650 
1651   else if (REG_P (x)
1652              && classp
1653              && ! qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
1654              && ! elt->is_const)
1655     {
1656       struct table_elt *p;
1657 
1658       for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1659           {
1660             if (p->is_const && !REG_P (p->exp))
1661               {
1662                 int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
1663                 struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
1664 
1665                 x_ent->const_rtx
1666                     = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1667                 x_ent->const_insn = this_insn;
1668                 break;
1669               }
1670           }
1671     }
1672 
1673   else if (REG_P (x)
1674              && qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_rtx
1675              && GET_MODE (x) == qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].mode)
1676     qty_table[REG_QTY (REGNO (x))].const_insn = this_insn;
1677 
1678   /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1679      and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1680      link it up with related expressions.  */
1681   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1682     {
1683       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1684       unsigned subhash;
1685       struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1686 
1687       if (subexp != 0)
1688           {
1689             /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table.  */
1690             subhash = SAFE_HASH (subexp, mode);
1691             subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1692             if (subelt == 0)
1693               subelt = insert (subexp, NULL, subhash, mode);
1694             /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none.  */
1695             if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1696               subelt->related_value = subelt;
1697             /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT.  */
1698             subelt_prev = subelt;
1699             while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1700               subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1701             /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1702                This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one.  */
1703             elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1704             subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1705           }
1706     }
1707 
1708   return elt;
1709 }
1710 
1711 /* Wrap insert_with_costs by passing the default costs.  */
1712 
1713 static struct table_elt *
insert(rtx x,struct table_elt * classp,unsigned int hash,machine_mode mode)1714 insert (rtx x, struct table_elt *classp, unsigned int hash,
1715           machine_mode mode)
1716 {
1717   return insert_with_costs (x, classp, hash, mode,
1718                                   COST (x, mode), approx_reg_cost (x));
1719 }
1720 
1721 
1722 /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1723    CLASS2 into CLASS1.  This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1724    the two classes equivalent.
1725 
1726    CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1727    call.
1728 
1729    Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied.  */
1730 
1731 static void
merge_equiv_classes(struct table_elt * class1,struct table_elt * class2)1732 merge_equiv_classes (struct table_elt *class1, struct table_elt *class2)
1733 {
1734   struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new_elt;
1735 
1736   /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes.  */
1737   class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1738   class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1739 
1740   /* If they were already equal, forget it.  */
1741   if (class1 == class2)
1742     return;
1743 
1744   for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1745     {
1746       unsigned int hash;
1747       rtx exp = elt->exp;
1748       machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1749 
1750       next = elt->next_same_value;
1751 
1752       /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1753            Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1754            hash code (it also isn't necessary).  */
1755       if (REG_P (exp) || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, false))
1756           {
1757             bool need_rehash = false;
1758 
1759             hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1760             hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1761 
1762             if (REG_P (exp))
1763               {
1764                 need_rehash = REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (exp));
1765                 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1766               }
1767 
1768             if (REG_P (exp) && REGNO (exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1769               remove_pseudo_from_table (exp, hash);
1770             else
1771               remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1772 
1773             if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0) || need_rehash)
1774               {
1775                 rehash_using_reg (exp);
1776                 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1777               }
1778             new_elt = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1779             new_elt->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1780             if (GET_CODE (exp) == ASM_OPERANDS && elt->cost == MAX_COST)
1781               new_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
1782           }
1783     }
1784 }
1785 
1786 /* Flush the entire hash table.  */
1787 
1788 static void
flush_hash_table(void)1789 flush_hash_table (void)
1790 {
1791   int i;
1792   struct table_elt *p;
1793 
1794   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1795     for (p = table[i]; p; p = table[i])
1796       {
1797           /* Note that invalidate can remove elements
1798              after P in the current hash chain.  */
1799           if (REG_P (p->exp))
1800             invalidate (p->exp, VOIDmode);
1801           else
1802             remove_from_table (p, i);
1803       }
1804 }
1805 
1806 /* Check whether an anti dependence exists between X and EXP.  MODE and
1807    ADDR are as for canon_anti_dependence.  */
1808 
1809 static bool
check_dependence(const_rtx x,rtx exp,machine_mode mode,rtx addr)1810 check_dependence (const_rtx x, rtx exp, machine_mode mode, rtx addr)
1811 {
1812   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
1813   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, x, NONCONST)
1814     {
1815       const_rtx x = *iter;
1816       if (MEM_P (x) && canon_anti_dependence (x, true, exp, mode, addr))
1817           return true;
1818     }
1819   return false;
1820 }
1821 
1822 /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid, all expressions whose
1823    values could be altered by storing in X.  X is a register, a subreg, or
1824    a memory reference with nonvarying address (because, when a memory
1825    reference with a varying address is stored in, all memory references are
1826    removed by invalidate_memory so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1827    FULL_MODE, if not VOIDmode, indicates that this much should be
1828    invalidated instead of just the amount indicated by the mode of X.  This
1829    is only used for bitfield stores into memory.
1830 
1831    A nonvarying address may be just a register or just a symbol reference,
1832    or it may be either of those plus a numeric offset.  */
1833 
1834 static void
invalidate(rtx x,machine_mode full_mode)1835 invalidate (rtx x, machine_mode full_mode)
1836 {
1837   int i;
1838   struct table_elt *p;
1839   rtx addr;
1840 
1841   switch (GET_CODE (x))
1842     {
1843     case REG:
1844       {
1845           /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents are recorded
1846              through the qty number mechanism.  Just change the qty number of
1847              the register, mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1848              and remove it itself.  */
1849           unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
1850           unsigned int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1851 
1852           /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1853              that its value might have changed.  If it is a pseudo, remove its
1854              entry from the hash table.
1855 
1856              For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1857              additional hard registers corresponding to X.  Then, if any of these
1858              registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1859              overlap these registers.  */
1860 
1861           delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1862           REG_TICK (regno)++;
1863           SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
1864 
1865           if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1866             remove_pseudo_from_table (x, hash);
1867           else
1868             {
1869               HOST_WIDE_INT in_table
1870                 = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1871               unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
1872               unsigned int tregno, tendregno, rn;
1873               struct table_elt *p, *next;
1874 
1875               CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1876 
1877               for (rn = regno + 1; rn < endregno; rn++)
1878                 {
1879                     in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
1880                     CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, rn);
1881                     delete_reg_equiv (rn);
1882                     REG_TICK (rn)++;
1883                     SUBREG_TICKED (rn) = -1;
1884                 }
1885 
1886               if (in_table)
1887                 for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
1888                     for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1889                       {
1890                         next = p->next_same_hash;
1891 
1892                         if (!REG_P (p->exp)
1893                               || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1894                           continue;
1895 
1896                         tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1897                         tendregno = END_REGNO (p->exp);
1898                         if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1899                           remove_from_table (p, hash);
1900                       }
1901             }
1902       }
1903       return;
1904 
1905     case SUBREG:
1906       invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode);
1907       return;
1908 
1909     case PARALLEL:
1910       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; --i)
1911           invalidate (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), VOIDmode);
1912       return;
1913 
1914     case EXPR_LIST:
1915       /* This is part of a disjoint return value; extract the location in
1916            question ignoring the offset.  */
1917       invalidate (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode);
1918       return;
1919 
1920     case MEM:
1921       addr = canon_rtx (get_addr (XEXP (x, 0)));
1922       /* Calculate the canonical version of X here so that
1923            true_dependence doesn't generate new RTL for X on each call.  */
1924       x = canon_rtx (x);
1925 
1926       /* Remove all hash table elements that refer to overlapping pieces of
1927            memory.  */
1928       if (full_mode == VOIDmode)
1929           full_mode = GET_MODE (x);
1930 
1931       for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1932           {
1933             struct table_elt *next;
1934 
1935             for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1936               {
1937                 next = p->next_same_hash;
1938                 if (p->in_memory)
1939                     {
1940                       /* Just canonicalize the expression once;
1941                          otherwise each time we call invalidate
1942                          true_dependence will canonicalize the
1943                          expression again.  */
1944                       if (!p->canon_exp)
1945                         p->canon_exp = canon_rtx (p->exp);
1946                       if (check_dependence (p->canon_exp, x, full_mode, addr))
1947                         remove_from_table (p, i);
1948                     }
1949               }
1950           }
1951       return;
1952 
1953     default:
1954       gcc_unreachable ();
1955     }
1956 }
1957 
1958 /* Invalidate DEST.  Used when DEST is not going to be added
1959    into the hash table for some reason, e.g. do_not_record
1960    flagged on it.  */
1961 
1962 static void
invalidate_dest(rtx dest)1963 invalidate_dest (rtx dest)
1964 {
1965   if (REG_P (dest)
1966       || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
1967       || MEM_P (dest))
1968     invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
1969   else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
1970              || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
1971     invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
1972 }
1973 
1974 /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1975    since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1976    mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1977    expressions to reappear as valid.  */
1978 
1979 static void
remove_invalid_refs(unsigned int regno)1980 remove_invalid_refs (unsigned int regno)
1981 {
1982   unsigned int i;
1983   struct table_elt *p, *next;
1984 
1985   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
1986     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1987       {
1988           next = p->next_same_hash;
1989           if (!REG_P (p->exp) && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
1990             remove_from_table (p, i);
1991       }
1992 }
1993 
1994 /* Likewise for a subreg with subreg_reg REGNO, subreg_byte OFFSET,
1995    and mode MODE.  */
1996 static void
remove_invalid_subreg_refs(unsigned int regno,poly_uint64 offset,machine_mode mode)1997 remove_invalid_subreg_refs (unsigned int regno, poly_uint64 offset,
1998                                   machine_mode mode)
1999 {
2000   unsigned int i;
2001   struct table_elt *p, *next;
2002 
2003   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
2004     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
2005       {
2006           rtx exp = p->exp;
2007           next = p->next_same_hash;
2008 
2009           if (!REG_P (exp)
2010               && (GET_CODE (exp) != SUBREG
2011                     || !REG_P (SUBREG_REG (exp))
2012                     || REGNO (SUBREG_REG (exp)) != regno
2013                     || ranges_maybe_overlap_p (SUBREG_BYTE (exp),
2014                                                      GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (exp)),
2015                                                      offset, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
2016               && refers_to_regno_p (regno, p->exp))
2017             remove_from_table (p, i);
2018       }
2019 }
2020 
2021 /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
2022    reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
2023 
2024    This is called when we make a jump equivalence.  */
2025 
2026 static void
rehash_using_reg(rtx x)2027 rehash_using_reg (rtx x)
2028 {
2029   unsigned int i;
2030   struct table_elt *p, *next;
2031   unsigned hash;
2032 
2033   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
2034     x = SUBREG_REG (x);
2035 
2036   /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
2037      valid entries in the table, we have no work to do.  */
2038 
2039   if (!REG_P (x)
2040       || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) < 0
2041       || REG_IN_TABLE (REGNO (x)) != REG_TICK (REGNO (x)))
2042     return;
2043 
2044   /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
2045      If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it.  */
2046 
2047   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
2048     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
2049       {
2050           next = p->next_same_hash;
2051           if (reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
2052               && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false)
2053               && i != (hash = SAFE_HASH (p->exp, p->mode)))
2054             {
2055               if (p->next_same_hash)
2056                 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
2057 
2058               if (p->prev_same_hash)
2059                 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
2060               else
2061                 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
2062 
2063               p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
2064               p->prev_same_hash = 0;
2065               if (table[hash])
2066                 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
2067               table[hash] = p;
2068             }
2069       }
2070 }
2071 
2072 /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
2073    register.  Also update their TICK values.  */
2074 
2075 static void
invalidate_for_call(void)2076 invalidate_for_call (void)
2077 {
2078   unsigned int regno, endregno;
2079   unsigned int i;
2080   unsigned hash;
2081   struct table_elt *p, *next;
2082   int in_table = 0;
2083   hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
2084 
2085   /* Go through all the hard registers.  For each that is clobbered in
2086      a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
2087      reg_tick if defined.  Also see if any of these registers is currently
2088      in the table.  */
2089   EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call, 0, regno, hrsi)
2090     {
2091       delete_reg_equiv (regno);
2092       if (REG_TICK (regno) >= 0)
2093           {
2094             REG_TICK (regno)++;
2095             SUBREG_TICKED (regno) = -1;
2096           }
2097       in_table |= (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno) != 0);
2098     }
2099 
2100   /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
2101      table, we are done.  Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
2102      entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register.  */
2103 
2104   if (in_table)
2105     for (hash = 0; hash < HASH_SIZE; hash++)
2106       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
2107           {
2108             next = p->next_same_hash;
2109 
2110             if (!REG_P (p->exp)
2111                 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2112               continue;
2113 
2114             regno = REGNO (p->exp);
2115             endregno = END_REGNO (p->exp);
2116 
2117             for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2118               if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
2119                 {
2120                     remove_from_table (p, hash);
2121                     break;
2122                 }
2123           }
2124 }
2125 
2126 /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
2127    and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
2128    is not in the hash table),
2129    return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
2130    If none can be found, return 0.  */
2131 
2132 static rtx
use_related_value(rtx x,struct table_elt * elt)2133 use_related_value (rtx x, struct table_elt *elt)
2134 {
2135   struct table_elt *relt = 0;
2136   struct table_elt *p, *q;
2137   HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
2138 
2139   /* First, is there anything related known?
2140      If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
2141      Otherwise, must look it up.  */
2142 
2143   if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
2144     relt = elt;
2145   else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
2146     {
2147       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
2148       if (subexp != 0)
2149           relt = lookup (subexp,
2150                            SAFE_HASH (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)),
2151                            GET_MODE (subexp));
2152     }
2153 
2154   if (relt == 0)
2155     return 0;
2156 
2157   /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
2158      equivalent register.  */
2159 
2160   p = relt;
2161   while (1)
2162     {
2163       /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
2164            The first is when X is already in the table.  Then it is searching
2165            the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT).  The second case is when
2166            X is not in the table.  Then RELT points to a class for the related
2167            value.
2168 
2169            Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
2170            the same value as X.  */
2171 
2172       if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
2173           q = 0;
2174       else
2175           for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
2176             if (REG_P (q->exp))
2177               break;
2178 
2179       if (q)
2180           break;
2181 
2182       p = p->related_value;
2183 
2184       /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
2185            Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
2186            and it has no related values recorded.  */
2187       if (p == relt || p == 0)
2188           break;
2189     }
2190 
2191   if (q == 0)
2192     return 0;
2193 
2194   offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
2195   /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity.  */
2196   return plus_constant (q->mode, q->exp, offset);
2197 }
2198 
2199 
2200 /* Hash a string.  Just add its bytes up.  */
2201 static inline unsigned
hash_rtx_string(const char * ps)2202 hash_rtx_string (const char *ps)
2203 {
2204   unsigned hash = 0;
2205   const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) ps;
2206 
2207   if (p)
2208     while (*p)
2209       hash += *p++;
2210 
2211   return hash;
2212 }
2213 
2214 /* Same as hash_rtx, but call CB on each rtx if it is not NULL.
2215    When the callback returns true, we continue with the new rtx.  */
2216 
2217 unsigned
hash_rtx_cb(const_rtx x,machine_mode mode,int * do_not_record_p,int * hash_arg_in_memory_p,bool have_reg_qty,hash_rtx_callback_function cb)2218 hash_rtx_cb (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
2219              int *do_not_record_p, int *hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2220              bool have_reg_qty, hash_rtx_callback_function cb)
2221 {
2222   int i, j;
2223   unsigned hash = 0;
2224   enum rtx_code code;
2225   const char *fmt;
2226   machine_mode newmode;
2227   rtx newx;
2228 
2229   /* Used to turn recursion into iteration.  We can't rely on GCC's
2230      tail-recursion elimination since we need to keep accumulating values
2231      in HASH.  */
2232  repeat:
2233   if (x == 0)
2234     return hash;
2235 
2236   /* Invoke the callback first.  */
2237   if (cb != NULL
2238       && ((*cb) (x, mode, &newx, &newmode)))
2239     {
2240       hash += hash_rtx_cb (newx, newmode, do_not_record_p,
2241                            hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, cb);
2242       return hash;
2243     }
2244 
2245   code = GET_CODE (x);
2246   switch (code)
2247     {
2248     case REG:
2249       {
2250           unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
2251 
2252           if (do_not_record_p && !reload_completed)
2253             {
2254               /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
2255                  because extending its life will cause reload problems.  We
2256                  consider ap, fp, sp, gp to be fixed for this purpose.
2257 
2258                  We also consider CCmode registers to be fixed for this purpose;
2259                  failure to do so leads to failure to simplify 0<100 type of
2260                  conditionals.
2261 
2262                  On all machines, we can't record any global registers.
2263                  Nor should we record any register that is in a small
2264                  class, as defined by TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P.  */
2265               bool record;
2266 
2267               if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2268                 record = true;
2269               else if (x == frame_pointer_rtx
2270                          || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
2271                          || x == arg_pointer_rtx
2272                          || x == stack_pointer_rtx
2273                          || x == pic_offset_table_rtx)
2274                 record = true;
2275               else if (global_regs[regno])
2276                 record = false;
2277               else if (fixed_regs[regno])
2278                 record = true;
2279               else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_CC)
2280                 record = true;
2281               else if (targetm.small_register_classes_for_mode_p (GET_MODE (x)))
2282                 record = false;
2283               else if (targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno)))
2284                 record = false;
2285               else
2286                 record = true;
2287 
2288               if (!record)
2289                 {
2290                     *do_not_record_p = 1;
2291                     return 0;
2292                 }
2293             }
2294 
2295           hash += ((unsigned int) REG << 7);
2296         hash += (have_reg_qty ? (unsigned) REG_QTY (regno) : regno);
2297           return hash;
2298       }
2299 
2300     /* We handle SUBREG of a REG specially because the underlying
2301        reg changes its hash value with every value change; we don't
2302        want to have to forget unrelated subregs when one subreg changes.  */
2303     case SUBREG:
2304       {
2305           if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
2306             {
2307               hash += (((unsigned int) SUBREG << 7)
2308                          + REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))
2309                          + (constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x))
2310                               / UNITS_PER_WORD));
2311               return hash;
2312             }
2313           break;
2314       }
2315 
2316     case CONST_INT:
2317       hash += (((unsigned int) CONST_INT << 7) + (unsigned int) mode
2318                + (unsigned int) INTVAL (x));
2319       return hash;
2320 
2321     case CONST_WIDE_INT:
2322       for (i = 0; i < CONST_WIDE_INT_NUNITS (x); i++)
2323           hash += CONST_WIDE_INT_ELT (x, i);
2324       return hash;
2325 
2326     case CONST_POLY_INT:
2327       {
2328           inchash::hash h;
2329           h.add_int (hash);
2330           for (unsigned int i = 0; i < NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS; ++i)
2331             h.add_wide_int (CONST_POLY_INT_COEFFS (x)[i]);
2332           return h.end ();
2333       }
2334 
2335     case CONST_DOUBLE:
2336       /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
2337            the integers representing the constant.  */
2338       hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
2339       if (TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT == 0 && GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
2340           hash += ((unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x)
2341                      + (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x));
2342       else
2343           hash += real_hash (CONST_DOUBLE_REAL_VALUE (x));
2344       return hash;
2345 
2346     case CONST_FIXED:
2347       hash += (unsigned int) code + (unsigned int) GET_MODE (x);
2348       hash += fixed_hash (CONST_FIXED_VALUE (x));
2349       return hash;
2350 
2351     case CONST_VECTOR:
2352       {
2353           int units;
2354           rtx elt;
2355 
2356           units = const_vector_encoded_nelts (x);
2357 
2358           for (i = 0; i < units; ++i)
2359             {
2360               elt = CONST_VECTOR_ENCODED_ELT (x, i);
2361               hash += hash_rtx_cb (elt, GET_MODE (elt),
2362                                  do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2363                                  have_reg_qty, cb);
2364             }
2365 
2366           return hash;
2367       }
2368 
2369       /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label.  */
2370     case LABEL_REF:
2371       /* We don't hash on the address of the CODE_LABEL to avoid bootstrap
2372            differences and differences between each stage's debugging dumps.  */
2373            hash += (((unsigned int) LABEL_REF << 7)
2374                       + CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (label_ref_label (x)));
2375       return hash;
2376 
2377     case SYMBOL_REF:
2378       {
2379           /* Don't hash on the symbol's address to avoid bootstrap differences.
2380              Different hash values may cause expressions to be recorded in
2381              different orders and thus different registers to be used in the
2382              final assembler.  This also avoids differences in the dump files
2383              between various stages.  */
2384           unsigned int h = 0;
2385           const unsigned char *p = (const unsigned char *) XSTR (x, 0);
2386 
2387           while (*p)
2388             h += (h << 7) + *p++; /* ??? revisit */
2389 
2390           hash += ((unsigned int) SYMBOL_REF << 7) + h;
2391           return hash;
2392       }
2393 
2394     case MEM:
2395       /* We don't record if marked volatile or if BLKmode since we don't
2396            know the size of the move.  */
2397       if (do_not_record_p && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode))
2398           {
2399             *do_not_record_p = 1;
2400             return 0;
2401           }
2402       if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
2403           *hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
2404 
2405       /* Now that we have already found this special case,
2406            might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
2407       hash += (unsigned) MEM;
2408       x = XEXP (x, 0);
2409       goto repeat;
2410 
2411     case USE:
2412       /* A USE that mentions non-volatile memory needs special
2413            handling since the MEM may be BLKmode which normally
2414            prevents an entry from being made.  Pure calls are
2415            marked by a USE which mentions BLKmode memory.
2416            See calls.c:emit_call_1.  */
2417       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
2418             && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
2419           {
2420             hash += (unsigned) USE;
2421             x = XEXP (x, 0);
2422 
2423             if (hash_arg_in_memory_p && !MEM_READONLY_P (x))
2424               *hash_arg_in_memory_p = 1;
2425 
2426             /* Now that we have already found this special case,
2427                might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
2428             hash += (unsigned) MEM;
2429             x = XEXP (x, 0);
2430             goto repeat;
2431           }
2432       break;
2433 
2434     case PRE_DEC:
2435     case PRE_INC:
2436     case POST_DEC:
2437     case POST_INC:
2438     case PRE_MODIFY:
2439     case POST_MODIFY:
2440     case PC:
2441     case CC0:
2442     case CALL:
2443     case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
2444       if (do_not_record_p) {
2445         *do_not_record_p = 1;
2446         return 0;
2447       }
2448       else
2449         return hash;
2450       break;
2451 
2452     case ASM_OPERANDS:
2453       if (do_not_record_p && MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
2454           {
2455             *do_not_record_p = 1;
2456             return 0;
2457           }
2458       else
2459           {
2460             /* We don't want to take the filename and line into account.  */
2461             hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x)
2462               + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x))
2463               + hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x))
2464               + (unsigned) ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x);
2465 
2466             if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
2467               {
2468                 for (i = 1; i < ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x); i++)
2469                     {
2470                       hash += (hash_rtx_cb (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
2471                                         GET_MODE (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i)),
2472                                         do_not_record_p, hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2473                                         have_reg_qty, cb)
2474                                  + hash_rtx_string
2475                            (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i)));
2476                     }
2477 
2478                 hash += hash_rtx_string (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, 0));
2479                 x = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, 0);
2480                 mode = GET_MODE (x);
2481                 goto repeat;
2482               }
2483 
2484             return hash;
2485           }
2486       break;
2487 
2488     default:
2489       break;
2490     }
2491 
2492   i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
2493   hash += (unsigned) code + (unsigned) GET_MODE (x);
2494   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2495   for (; i >= 0; i--)
2496     {
2497       switch (fmt[i])
2498           {
2499           case 'e':
2500             /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
2501                needed at this level, change it into iteration.
2502                This function  is called enough to be worth it.  */
2503             if (i == 0)
2504               {
2505                 x = XEXP (x, i);
2506                 goto repeat;
2507               }
2508 
2509             hash += hash_rtx_cb (XEXP (x, i), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
2510                                hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2511                                have_reg_qty, cb);
2512             break;
2513 
2514           case 'E':
2515             for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2516               hash += hash_rtx_cb (XVECEXP (x, i, j), VOIDmode, do_not_record_p,
2517                                  hash_arg_in_memory_p,
2518                                  have_reg_qty, cb);
2519             break;
2520 
2521           case 's':
2522             hash += hash_rtx_string (XSTR (x, i));
2523             break;
2524 
2525           case 'i':
2526             hash += (unsigned int) XINT (x, i);
2527             break;
2528 
2529           case 'p':
2530             hash += constant_lower_bound (SUBREG_BYTE (x));
2531             break;
2532 
2533           case '0': case 't':
2534             /* Unused.  */
2535             break;
2536 
2537           default:
2538             gcc_unreachable ();
2539           }
2540     }
2541 
2542   return hash;
2543 }
2544 
2545 /* Hash an rtx.  We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
2546    Equivalent registers hash identically.
2547    MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
2548    otherwise the mode of X is used.
2549 
2550    Store 1 in DO_NOT_RECORD_P if any subexpression is volatile.
2551 
2552    If HASH_ARG_IN_MEMORY_P is not NULL, store 1 in it if X contains
2553    a MEM rtx which does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set.
2554 
2555    Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
2556    is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address.  */
2557 
2558 unsigned
hash_rtx(const_rtx x,machine_mode mode,int * do_not_record_p,int * hash_arg_in_memory_p,bool have_reg_qty)2559 hash_rtx (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int *do_not_record_p,
2560             int *hash_arg_in_memory_p, bool have_reg_qty)
2561 {
2562   return hash_rtx_cb (x, mode, do_not_record_p,
2563                       hash_arg_in_memory_p, have_reg_qty, NULL);
2564 }
2565 
2566 /* Hash an rtx X for cse via hash_rtx.
2567    Stores 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
2568    Stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a mem rtx which
2569    does not have the MEM_READONLY_P flag set.  */
2570 
2571 static inline unsigned
canon_hash(rtx x,machine_mode mode)2572 canon_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
2573 {
2574   return hash_rtx (x, mode, &do_not_record, &hash_arg_in_memory, true);
2575 }
2576 
2577 /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects, i.e. do_not_record
2578    and hash_arg_in_memory are not changed.  */
2579 
2580 static inline unsigned
safe_hash(rtx x,machine_mode mode)2581 safe_hash (rtx x, machine_mode mode)
2582 {
2583   int dummy_do_not_record;
2584   return hash_rtx (x, mode, &dummy_do_not_record, NULL, true);
2585 }
2586 
2587 /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
2588    without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
2589    If VALIDATE is nonzero,
2590    we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
2591    and Y was found in the hash table.  We check register refs
2592    in Y for being marked as valid.
2593 
2594    If FOR_GCSE is true, we compare X and Y for equivalence for GCSE.  */
2595 
2596 int
exp_equiv_p(const_rtx x,const_rtx y,int validate,bool for_gcse)2597 exp_equiv_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx y, int validate, bool for_gcse)
2598 {
2599   int i, j;
2600   enum rtx_code code;
2601   const char *fmt;
2602 
2603   /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
2604      if VALIDATE is nonzero.  */
2605   if (x == y && !validate)
2606     return 1;
2607 
2608   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2609     return x == y;
2610 
2611   code = GET_CODE (x);
2612   if (code != GET_CODE (y))
2613     return 0;
2614 
2615   /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
2616   if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
2617     return 0;
2618 
2619   /* MEMs referring to different address space are not equivalent.  */
2620   if (code == MEM && MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x) != MEM_ADDR_SPACE (y))
2621     return 0;
2622 
2623   switch (code)
2624     {
2625     case PC:
2626     case CC0:
2627     CASE_CONST_UNIQUE:
2628       return x == y;
2629 
2630     case LABEL_REF:
2631       return label_ref_label (x) == label_ref_label (y);
2632 
2633     case SYMBOL_REF:
2634       return XSTR (x, 0) == XSTR (y, 0);
2635 
2636     case REG:
2637       if (for_gcse)
2638           return REGNO (x) == REGNO (y);
2639       else
2640           {
2641             unsigned int regno = REGNO (y);
2642             unsigned int i;
2643             unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (y);
2644 
2645             /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2646                equivalent.  If there are and we are not to validate, they
2647                are equivalent.  Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date.  */
2648 
2649             if (REG_QTY (REGNO (x)) != REG_QTY (regno))
2650               return 0;
2651 
2652             if (! validate)
2653               return 1;
2654 
2655             for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2656               if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) != REG_TICK (i))
2657                 return 0;
2658 
2659             return 1;
2660           }
2661 
2662     case MEM:
2663       if (for_gcse)
2664           {
2665             /* A volatile mem should not be considered equivalent to any
2666                other.  */
2667             if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
2668               return 0;
2669 
2670             /* Can't merge two expressions in different alias sets, since we
2671                can decide that the expression is transparent in a block when
2672                it isn't, due to it being set with the different alias set.
2673 
2674                Also, can't merge two expressions with different MEM_ATTRS.
2675                They could e.g. be two different entities allocated into the
2676                same space on the stack (see e.g. PR25130).  In that case, the
2677                MEM addresses can be the same, even though the two MEMs are
2678                absolutely not equivalent.
2679 
2680                But because really all MEM attributes should be the same for
2681                equivalent MEMs, we just use the invariant that MEMs that have
2682                the same attributes share the same mem_attrs data structure.  */
2683             if (!mem_attrs_eq_p (MEM_ATTRS (x), MEM_ATTRS (y)))
2684               return 0;
2685 
2686             /* If we are handling exceptions, we cannot consider two expressions
2687                with different trapping status as equivalent, because simple_mem
2688                might accept one and reject the other.  */
2689             if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions
2690                 && (MEM_NOTRAP_P (x) != MEM_NOTRAP_P (y)))
2691               return 0;
2692           }
2693       break;
2694 
2695     /*  For commutative operations, check both orders.  */
2696     case PLUS:
2697     case MULT:
2698     case AND:
2699     case IOR:
2700     case XOR:
2701     case NE:
2702     case EQ:
2703       return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0),
2704                                    validate, for_gcse)
2705                  && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2706                                         validate, for_gcse))
2707                 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2708                                         validate, for_gcse)
2709                       && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2710                                            validate, for_gcse)));
2711 
2712     case ASM_OPERANDS:
2713       /* We don't use the generic code below because we want to
2714            disregard filename and line numbers.  */
2715 
2716       /* A volatile asm isn't equivalent to any other.  */
2717       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (y))
2718           return 0;
2719 
2720       if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y)
2721             || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (x), ASM_OPERANDS_TEMPLATE (y))
2722             || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (x),
2723                          ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_CONSTRAINT (y))
2724             || ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_OUTPUT_IDX (y)
2725             || ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) != ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (y))
2726           return 0;
2727 
2728       if (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x))
2729           {
2730             for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2731               if (! exp_equiv_p (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
2732                                      ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (y, i),
2733                                      validate, for_gcse)
2734                     || strcmp (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (x, i),
2735                                  ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_CONSTRAINT (y, i)))
2736                 return 0;
2737           }
2738 
2739       return 1;
2740 
2741     default:
2742       break;
2743     }
2744 
2745   /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
2746      fail to match, return 0 for the whole thing.  */
2747 
2748   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2749   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2750     {
2751       switch (fmt[i])
2752           {
2753           case 'e':
2754             if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i),
2755                                     validate, for_gcse))
2756               return 0;
2757             break;
2758 
2759           case 'E':
2760             if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2761               return 0;
2762             for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2763               if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2764                                         validate, for_gcse))
2765                 return 0;
2766             break;
2767 
2768           case 's':
2769             if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2770               return 0;
2771             break;
2772 
2773           case 'i':
2774             if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2775               return 0;
2776             break;
2777 
2778           case 'w':
2779             if (XWINT (x, i) != XWINT (y, i))
2780               return 0;
2781             break;
2782 
2783           case 'p':
2784             if (maybe_ne (SUBREG_BYTE (x), SUBREG_BYTE (y)))
2785               return 0;
2786             break;
2787 
2788           case '0':
2789           case 't':
2790             break;
2791 
2792           default:
2793             gcc_unreachable ();
2794           }
2795     }
2796 
2797   return 1;
2798 }
2799 
2800 /* Subroutine of canon_reg.  Pass *XLOC through canon_reg, and validate
2801    the result if necessary.  INSN is as for canon_reg.  */
2802 
2803 static void
validate_canon_reg(rtx * xloc,rtx_insn * insn)2804 validate_canon_reg (rtx *xloc, rtx_insn *insn)
2805 {
2806   if (*xloc)
2807     {
2808       rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (*xloc, insn);
2809 
2810       /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
2811          insn remains valid.  Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs.  */
2812       gcc_assert (insn && new_rtx);
2813       validate_change (insn, xloc, new_rtx, 1);
2814     }
2815 }
2816 
2817 /* Canonicalize an expression:
2818    replace each register reference inside it
2819    with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2820 
2821    If INSN is nonzero validate_change is used to ensure that INSN remains valid
2822    after we make our substitution.  The calls are made with IN_GROUP nonzero
2823    so apply_change_group must be called upon the outermost return from this
2824    function (unless INSN is zero).  The result of apply_change_group can
2825    generally be discarded since the changes we are making are optional.  */
2826 
2827 static rtx
canon_reg(rtx x,rtx_insn * insn)2828 canon_reg (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
2829 {
2830   int i;
2831   enum rtx_code code;
2832   const char *fmt;
2833 
2834   if (x == 0)
2835     return x;
2836 
2837   code = GET_CODE (x);
2838   switch (code)
2839     {
2840     case PC:
2841     case CC0:
2842     case CONST:
2843     CASE_CONST_ANY:
2844     case SYMBOL_REF:
2845     case LABEL_REF:
2846     case ADDR_VEC:
2847     case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2848       return x;
2849 
2850     case REG:
2851       {
2852           int first;
2853           int q;
2854           struct qty_table_elem *ent;
2855 
2856           /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2857              in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2858              of each occurrence.  Also, some hard regs appear in
2859              MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered.  Don't try to
2860              replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS.  */
2861           if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2862               || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2863             return x;
2864 
2865           q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
2866           ent = &qty_table[q];
2867           first = ent->first_reg;
2868           return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2869                     : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2870                     : gen_rtx_REG (ent->mode, first));
2871       }
2872 
2873     default:
2874       break;
2875     }
2876 
2877   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2878   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2879     {
2880       int j;
2881 
2882       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2883           validate_canon_reg (&XEXP (x, i), insn);
2884       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2885           for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2886             validate_canon_reg (&XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2887     }
2888 
2889   return x;
2890 }
2891 
2892 /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2893    operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2894    what values are being compared.
2895 
2896    *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2897    actually being compared.  For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2898    was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2899    compared to produce cc0.
2900 
2901    The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2902    A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison.  */
2903 
2904 static enum rtx_code
find_comparison_args(enum rtx_code code,rtx * parg1,rtx * parg2,machine_mode * pmode1,machine_mode * pmode2)2905 find_comparison_args (enum rtx_code code, rtx *parg1, rtx *parg2,
2906                           machine_mode *pmode1, machine_mode *pmode2)
2907 {
2908   rtx arg1, arg2;
2909   hash_set<rtx> *visited = NULL;
2910   /* Set nonzero when we find something of interest.  */
2911   rtx x = NULL;
2912 
2913   arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2914 
2915   /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to.  */
2916 
2917   while (arg2 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (arg1)))
2918     {
2919       int reverse_code = 0;
2920       struct table_elt *p = 0;
2921 
2922       /* Remember state from previous iteration.  */
2923       if (x)
2924           {
2925             if (!visited)
2926               visited = new hash_set<rtx>;
2927             visited->add (x);
2928             x = 0;
2929           }
2930 
2931       /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2932            On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2933            fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2934            when given CC0.  */
2935 
2936       if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2937           x = arg1;
2938 
2939       /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2940            STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments.  */
2941 
2942       else if (COMPARISON_P (arg1))
2943           {
2944 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2945             REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
2946 #endif
2947 
2948             if (code == NE
2949                 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2950                       && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2951 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2952                 || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
2953                       && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
2954                           REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
2955 #endif
2956                 )
2957               x = arg1;
2958             else if (code == EQ
2959                        || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2960                            && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2961 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2962                        || (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (arg1))
2963                            && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
2964                                  REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
2965 #endif
2966                        )
2967               x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2968           }
2969 
2970       /* ??? We could also check for
2971 
2972            (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2973 
2974            and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring.  */
2975 
2976       if (x == 0)
2977           /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2978              that lets us see what is being compared.  */
2979           p = lookup (arg1, SAFE_HASH (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)), GET_MODE (arg1));
2980       if (p)
2981           {
2982             p = p->first_same_value;
2983 
2984             /* If what we compare is already known to be constant, that is as
2985                good as it gets.
2986                We need to break the loop in this case, because otherwise we
2987                can have an infinite loop when looking at a reg that is known
2988                to be a constant which is the same as a comparison of a reg
2989                against zero which appears later in the insn stream, which in
2990                turn is constant and the same as the comparison of the first reg
2991                against zero...  */
2992             if (p->is_const)
2993               break;
2994           }
2995 
2996       for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2997           {
2998             machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2999 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3000             REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
3001 #endif
3002 
3003             /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
3004             if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
3005               continue;
3006 
3007             /* If it's a comparison we've used before, skip it.  */
3008             if (visited && visited->contains (p->exp))
3009               continue;
3010 
3011             if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
3012                 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
3013                      that includes the comparison code.  In that case, ARG1 would
3014                      be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
3015                      either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero.  If this is an NE operation,
3016                      ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
3017                      we must reverse ORIG_CODE.  On machine with a negative value
3018                      for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations.  */
3019                 || ((code == NE
3020                        || (code == LT
3021                            && val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
3022                                                                STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
3023 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3024                        || (code == LT
3025                            && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
3026                            && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
3027                                  REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
3028 #endif
3029                        )
3030                       && COMPARISON_P (p->exp)))
3031               {
3032                 x = p->exp;
3033                 break;
3034               }
3035             else if ((code == EQ
3036                         || (code == GE
3037                               && val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
3038                                                                 STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
3039 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3040                         || (code == GE
3041                               && SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
3042                               && (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (GET_MODE (arg1)),
3043                                   REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
3044 #endif
3045                         )
3046                        && COMPARISON_P (p->exp))
3047               {
3048                 reverse_code = 1;
3049                 x = p->exp;
3050                 break;
3051               }
3052 
3053             /* If this non-trapping address, e.g. fp + constant, the
3054                equivalent is a better operand since it may let us predict
3055                the value of the comparison.  */
3056             else if (!rtx_addr_can_trap_p (p->exp))
3057               {
3058                 arg1 = p->exp;
3059                 continue;
3060               }
3061           }
3062 
3063       /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
3064            Otherwise, set up for the next iteration.  */
3065       if (x == 0)
3066           break;
3067 
3068       /* If we need to reverse the comparison, make sure that is
3069            possible -- we can't necessarily infer the value of GE from LT
3070            with floating-point operands.  */
3071       if (reverse_code)
3072           {
3073             enum rtx_code reversed = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
3074             if (reversed == UNKNOWN)
3075               break;
3076             else
3077               code = reversed;
3078           }
3079       else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
3080           code = GET_CODE (x);
3081       arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
3082     }
3083 
3084   /* Return our results.  Return the modes from before fold_rtx
3085      because fold_rtx might produce const_int, and then it's too late.  */
3086   *pmode1 = GET_MODE (arg1), *pmode2 = GET_MODE (arg2);
3087   *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
3088 
3089   if (visited)
3090     delete visited;
3091   return code;
3092 }
3093 
3094 /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument for which
3095    a constant value can be determined, return the result of operating
3096    on that value, as a constant.  Otherwise, return X, possibly with
3097    one or more operands changed to a forward-propagated constant.
3098 
3099    If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT return
3100    those contents here; equiv_constant is called to perform that task.
3101    For SUBREGs and MEMs, we do that both here and in equiv_constant.
3102 
3103    INSN is the insn that we may be modifying.  If it is 0, make a copy
3104    of X before modifying it.  */
3105 
3106 static rtx
fold_rtx(rtx x,rtx_insn * insn)3107 fold_rtx (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
3108 {
3109   enum rtx_code code;
3110   machine_mode mode;
3111   const char *fmt;
3112   int i;
3113   rtx new_rtx = 0;
3114   int changed = 0;
3115 
3116   /* Operands of X.  */
3117   /* Workaround -Wmaybe-uninitialized false positive during
3118      profiledbootstrap by initializing them.  */
3119   rtx folded_arg0 = NULL_RTX;
3120   rtx folded_arg1 = NULL_RTX;
3121 
3122   /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
3123      0 when no such equivalent is known.  */
3124   rtx const_arg0;
3125   rtx const_arg1;
3126   rtx const_arg2;
3127 
3128   /* The mode of the first operand of X.  We need this for sign and zero
3129      extends.  */
3130   machine_mode mode_arg0;
3131 
3132   if (x == 0)
3133     return x;
3134 
3135   /* Try to perform some initial simplifications on X.  */
3136   code = GET_CODE (x);
3137   switch (code)
3138     {
3139     case MEM:
3140     case SUBREG:
3141     /* The first operand of a SIGN/ZERO_EXTRACT has a different meaning
3142        than it would in other contexts.  Basically its mode does not
3143        signify the size of the object read.  That information is carried
3144        by size operand.    If we happen to have a MEM of the appropriate
3145        mode in our tables with a constant value we could simplify the
3146        extraction incorrectly if we allowed substitution of that value
3147        for the MEM.   */
3148     case ZERO_EXTRACT:
3149     case SIGN_EXTRACT:
3150       if ((new_rtx = equiv_constant (x)) != NULL_RTX)
3151         return new_rtx;
3152       return x;
3153 
3154     case CONST:
3155     CASE_CONST_ANY:
3156     case SYMBOL_REF:
3157     case LABEL_REF:
3158     case REG:
3159     case PC:
3160       /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
3161            since they are used only for lists of args
3162            in a function call's REG_EQUAL note.  */
3163     case EXPR_LIST:
3164       return x;
3165 
3166     case CC0:
3167       return prev_insn_cc0;
3168 
3169     case ASM_OPERANDS:
3170       if (insn)
3171           {
3172             for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3173               validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i),
3174                                    fold_rtx (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), insn), 0);
3175           }
3176       return x;
3177 
3178     case CALL:
3179       if (NO_FUNCTION_CSE && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
3180           return x;
3181       break;
3182 
3183     /* Anything else goes through the loop below.  */
3184     default:
3185       break;
3186     }
3187 
3188   mode = GET_MODE (x);
3189   const_arg0 = 0;
3190   const_arg1 = 0;
3191   const_arg2 = 0;
3192   mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
3193 
3194   /* Try folding our operands.
3195      Then see which ones have constant values known.  */
3196 
3197   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
3198   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3199     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
3200       {
3201           rtx folded_arg = XEXP (x, i), const_arg;
3202           machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (folded_arg);
3203 
3204           switch (GET_CODE (folded_arg))
3205             {
3206             case MEM:
3207             case REG:
3208             case SUBREG:
3209               const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
3210               break;
3211 
3212             case CONST:
3213             CASE_CONST_ANY:
3214             case SYMBOL_REF:
3215             case LABEL_REF:
3216               const_arg = folded_arg;
3217               break;
3218 
3219             case CC0:
3220               /* The cc0-user and cc0-setter may be in different blocks if
3221                  the cc0-setter potentially traps.  In that case PREV_INSN_CC0
3222                  will have been cleared as we exited the block with the
3223                  setter.
3224 
3225                  While we could potentially track cc0 in this case, it just
3226                  doesn't seem to be worth it given that cc0 targets are not
3227                  terribly common or important these days and trapping math
3228                  is rarely used.  The combination of those two conditions
3229                  necessary to trip this situation is exceedingly rare in the
3230                  real world.  */
3231               if (!prev_insn_cc0)
3232                 {
3233                     const_arg = NULL_RTX;
3234                 }
3235               else
3236                 {
3237                     folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
3238                     mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
3239                     const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
3240                 }
3241               break;
3242 
3243             default:
3244               folded_arg = fold_rtx (folded_arg, insn);
3245               const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
3246               break;
3247             }
3248 
3249           /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
3250              is constant or equivalent to a constant.  */
3251           switch (i)
3252             {
3253             case 0:
3254               folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
3255               const_arg0 = const_arg;
3256               mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
3257               break;
3258             case 1:
3259               folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
3260               const_arg1 = const_arg;
3261               break;
3262             case 2:
3263               const_arg2 = const_arg;
3264               break;
3265             }
3266 
3267           /* Pick the least expensive of the argument and an equivalent constant
3268              argument.  */
3269           if (const_arg != 0
3270               && const_arg != folded_arg
3271               && (COST_IN (const_arg, mode_arg, code, i)
3272                     <= COST_IN (folded_arg, mode_arg, code, i))
3273 
3274               /* It's not safe to substitute the operand of a conversion
3275                  operator with a constant, as the conversion's identity
3276                  depends upon the mode of its operand.  This optimization
3277                  is handled by the call to simplify_unary_operation.  */
3278               && (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != RTX_UNARY
3279                     || GET_MODE (const_arg) == mode_arg0
3280                     || (code != ZERO_EXTEND
3281                         && code != SIGN_EXTEND
3282                         && code != TRUNCATE
3283                         && code != FLOAT_TRUNCATE
3284                         && code != FLOAT_EXTEND
3285                         && code != FLOAT
3286                         && code != FIX
3287                         && code != UNSIGNED_FLOAT
3288                         && code != UNSIGNED_FIX)))
3289             folded_arg = const_arg;
3290 
3291           if (folded_arg == XEXP (x, i))
3292             continue;
3293 
3294           if (insn == NULL_RTX && !changed)
3295             x = copy_rtx (x);
3296           changed = 1;
3297           validate_unshare_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), folded_arg, 1);
3298       }
3299 
3300   if (changed)
3301     {
3302       /* Canonicalize X if necessary, and keep const_argN and folded_argN
3303            consistent with the order in X.  */
3304       if (canonicalize_change_group (insn, x))
3305           {
3306             std::swap (const_arg0, const_arg1);
3307             std::swap (folded_arg0, folded_arg1);
3308           }
3309 
3310       apply_change_group ();
3311     }
3312 
3313   /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it.  */
3314 
3315   switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
3316     {
3317     case RTX_UNARY:
3318       {
3319           /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the
3320              original mode.  */
3321           if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
3322               && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
3323             break;
3324 
3325           new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
3326                                                       const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3327                                                       mode_arg0);
3328       }
3329       break;
3330 
3331     case RTX_COMPARE:
3332     case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
3333       /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
3334            to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code.  If any are
3335            constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately.  We needn't
3336            do anything if both operands are already known to be constant.  */
3337 
3338       /* ??? Vector mode comparisons are not supported yet.  */
3339       if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
3340           break;
3341 
3342       if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
3343           {
3344             struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
3345             rtx true_rtx, false_rtx;
3346             machine_mode mode_arg1;
3347 
3348             if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
3349               {
3350 #ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
3351                 true_rtx = (const_double_from_real_value
3352                                 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (mode), mode));
3353 #else
3354                 true_rtx = NULL_RTX;
3355 #endif
3356                 false_rtx = CONST0_RTX (mode);
3357               }
3358             else
3359               {
3360                 true_rtx = const_true_rtx;
3361                 false_rtx = const0_rtx;
3362               }
3363 
3364             code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1,
3365                                                &mode_arg0, &mode_arg1);
3366 
3367             /* If the mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know
3368                what kinds of things are being compared, so we can't do
3369                anything with this comparison.  */
3370 
3371             if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
3372               break;
3373 
3374             const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
3375             const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
3376 
3377             /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see
3378                if we can nevertheless deduce some things about the
3379                comparison.  */
3380             if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
3381               {
3382                 if (const_arg1 != NULL)
3383                     {
3384                       rtx cheapest_simplification;
3385                       int cheapest_cost;
3386                       rtx simp_result;
3387                       struct table_elt *p;
3388 
3389                       /* See if we can find an equivalent of folded_arg0
3390                          that gets us a cheaper expression, possibly a
3391                          constant through simplifications.  */
3392                       p = lookup (folded_arg0, SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
3393                                     mode_arg0);
3394 
3395                       if (p != NULL)
3396                         {
3397                           cheapest_simplification = x;
3398                           cheapest_cost = COST (x, mode);
3399 
3400                           for (p = p->first_same_value; p != NULL; p = p->next_same_value)
3401                               {
3402                                 int cost;
3403 
3404                                 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
3405                                 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
3406                                   continue;
3407 
3408                                 /* Try to simplify using this equivalence.  */
3409                                 simp_result
3410                                   = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode,
3411                                                                            mode_arg0,
3412                                                                            p->exp,
3413                                                                            const_arg1);
3414 
3415                                 if (simp_result == NULL)
3416                                   continue;
3417 
3418                                 cost = COST (simp_result, mode);
3419                                 if (cost < cheapest_cost)
3420                                   {
3421                                     cheapest_cost = cost;
3422                                     cheapest_simplification = simp_result;
3423                                   }
3424                               }
3425 
3426                           /* If we have a cheaper expression now, use that
3427                                and try folding it further, from the top.  */
3428                           if (cheapest_simplification != x)
3429                               return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (cheapest_simplification),
3430                                                    insn);
3431                         }
3432                     }
3433 
3434                 /* See if the two operands are the same.  */
3435 
3436                 if ((REG_P (folded_arg0)
3437                        && REG_P (folded_arg1)
3438                        && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0))
3439                            == REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1))))
3440                       || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
3441                                             SAFE_HASH (folded_arg0, mode_arg0),
3442                                             mode_arg0))
3443                           && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
3444                                                SAFE_HASH (folded_arg1, mode_arg0),
3445                                                mode_arg0))
3446                           && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value))
3447                     folded_arg1 = folded_arg0;
3448 
3449                 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
3450                      doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
3451                      (we only check the reverse if not floating-point).  */
3452                 else if (REG_P (folded_arg0))
3453                     {
3454                       int qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg0));
3455 
3456                       if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0)))
3457                         {
3458                           struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[qty];
3459 
3460                           if ((comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code)
3461                                  || (! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode_arg0)
3462                                      && comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code,
3463                                                                       reverse_condition (code))))
3464                                 && (rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const, folded_arg1)
3465                                     || (const_arg1
3466                                           && rtx_equal_p (ent->comparison_const,
3467                                                               const_arg1))
3468                                     || (REG_P (folded_arg1)
3469                                           && (REG_QTY (REGNO (folded_arg1)) == ent->comparison_qty))))
3470                               {
3471                                 if (comparison_dominates_p (ent->comparison_code, code))
3472                                   {
3473                                     if (true_rtx)
3474                                         return true_rtx;
3475                                     else
3476                                         break;
3477                                   }
3478                                 else
3479                                   return false_rtx;
3480                               }
3481                         }
3482                     }
3483               }
3484           }
3485 
3486       /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
3487            equivalent to an IOR with a constant.  If so, we may be able to
3488            determine the result of this comparison.  */
3489       if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx && !const_arg0)
3490           {
3491             rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
3492             rtx inner_const;
3493 
3494             if (y != 0
3495                 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
3496                 && CONST_INT_P (inner_const)
3497                 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
3498               folded_arg0 = gen_rtx_IOR (mode_arg0, XEXP (y, 0), inner_const);
3499           }
3500 
3501       {
3502           rtx op0 = const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : copy_rtx (folded_arg0);
3503           rtx op1 = const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : copy_rtx (folded_arg1);
3504           new_rtx = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
3505                                                              op0, op1);
3506       }
3507       break;
3508 
3509     case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
3510     case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
3511       switch (code)
3512           {
3513           case PLUS:
3514             /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
3515                with that LABEL_REF as its second operand.  If so, the result is
3516                the first operand of that MINUS.  This handles switches with an
3517                ADDR_DIFF_VEC table.  */
3518             if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
3519               {
3520                 rtx y
3521                     = GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == MINUS ? folded_arg0
3522                     : lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
3523 
3524                 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
3525                       && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
3526                     return XEXP (y, 0);
3527 
3528                 /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above.  */
3529                 if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST ? folded_arg0
3530                               : lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, CONST))) != 0
3531                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
3532                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
3533                       && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg1))
3534                     return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
3535               }
3536 
3537             /* Likewise if the operands are in the other order.  */
3538             if (const_arg0 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == LABEL_REF)
3539               {
3540                 rtx y
3541                     = GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == MINUS ? folded_arg1
3542                     : lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, MINUS);
3543 
3544                 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
3545                       && label_ref_label (XEXP (y, 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
3546                     return XEXP (y, 0);
3547 
3548                 /* Now try for a CONST of a MINUS like the above.  */
3549                 if ((y = (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == CONST ? folded_arg1
3550                               : lookup_as_function (folded_arg1, CONST))) != 0
3551                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MINUS
3552                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF
3553                       && label_ref_label (XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 1)) == label_ref_label (const_arg0))
3554                     return XEXP (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
3555               }
3556 
3557             /* If second operand is a register equivalent to a negative
3558                CONST_INT, see if we can find a register equivalent to the
3559                positive constant.  Make a MINUS if so.  Don't do this for
3560                a non-negative constant since we might then alternate between
3561                choosing positive and negative constants.  Having the positive
3562                constant previously-used is the more common case.  Be sure
3563                the resulting constant is non-negative; if const_arg1 were
3564                the smallest negative number this would overflow: depending
3565                on the mode, this would either just be the same value (and
3566                hence not save anything) or be incorrect.  */
3567             if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1)
3568                 && INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0
3569                 /* This used to test
3570 
3571                    -INTVAL (const_arg1) >= 0
3572 
3573                      But The Sun V5.0 compilers mis-compiled that test.  So
3574                      instead we test for the problematic value in a more direct
3575                      manner and hope the Sun compilers get it correct.  */
3576                 && INTVAL (const_arg1) !=
3577                   (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1))
3578                 && REG_P (folded_arg1))
3579               {
3580                 rtx new_const = GEN_INT (-INTVAL (const_arg1));
3581                 struct table_elt *p
3582                     = lookup (new_const, SAFE_HASH (new_const, mode), mode);
3583 
3584                 if (p)
3585                     for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
3586                       if (REG_P (p->exp))
3587                         return simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, folded_arg0,
3588                                                             canon_reg (p->exp, NULL));
3589               }
3590             goto from_plus;
3591 
3592           case MINUS:
3593             /* If we have (MINUS Y C), see if Y is known to be (PLUS Z C2).
3594                If so, produce (PLUS Z C2-C).  */
3595             if (const_arg1 != 0 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
3596               {
3597                 rtx y = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), PLUS);
3598                 if (y && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (y, 1)))
3599                     return fold_rtx (plus_constant (mode, copy_rtx (y),
3600                                                             -INTVAL (const_arg1)),
3601                                          NULL);
3602               }
3603 
3604             /* Fall through.  */
3605 
3606           from_plus:
3607           case SMIN:    case SMAX:      case UMIN:    case UMAX:
3608           case IOR:     case AND:       case XOR:
3609           case MULT:
3610           case ASHIFT:  case LSHIFTRT:  case ASHIFTRT:
3611             /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
3612                is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
3613                operation with a combined operation.  This may eliminate the
3614                intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
3615                Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
3616                if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference.  */
3617 
3618             if (REG_P (folded_arg0)
3619                 && const_arg1 && CONST_INT_P (const_arg1))
3620               {
3621                 int is_shift
3622                     = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
3623                 rtx y, inner_const, new_const;
3624                 rtx canon_const_arg1 = const_arg1;
3625                 enum rtx_code associate_code;
3626 
3627                 if (is_shift
3628                       && (INTVAL (const_arg1) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
3629                           || INTVAL (const_arg1) < 0))
3630                     {
3631                       if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3632                         canon_const_arg1 = gen_int_shift_amount
3633                           (mode, (INTVAL (const_arg1)
3634                                     & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
3635                       else
3636                         break;
3637                     }
3638 
3639                 y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
3640                 if (y == 0)
3641                     break;
3642 
3643                 /* If we have compiled a statement like
3644                      "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
3645                      "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
3646                      of Y is the same as our first operand.  Unless we detect
3647                      this case, an infinite loop will result.  */
3648                 if (XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
3649                     break;
3650 
3651                 inner_const = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0));
3652                 if (!inner_const || !CONST_INT_P (inner_const))
3653                     break;
3654 
3655                 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
3656                      same constant and it is a power of two.  These might be doable
3657                      with a pre- or post-increment.  Similarly for two subtracts of
3658                      identical powers of two with post decrement.  */
3659 
3660                 if (code == PLUS && const_arg1 == inner_const
3661                       && ((HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
3662                                 && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3663                           || (HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
3664                                 && pow2p_hwi (INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3665                           || (HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
3666                                 && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))
3667                           || (HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
3668                                 && pow2p_hwi (- INTVAL (const_arg1)))))
3669                     break;
3670 
3671                 /* ??? Vector mode shifts by scalar
3672                      shift operand are not supported yet.  */
3673                 if (is_shift && VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
3674                 break;
3675 
3676                 if (is_shift
3677                       && (INTVAL (inner_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode)
3678                           || INTVAL (inner_const) < 0))
3679                     {
3680                       if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
3681                         inner_const = gen_int_shift_amount
3682                           (mode, (INTVAL (inner_const)
3683                                     & (GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1)));
3684                       else
3685                         break;
3686                     }
3687 
3688                 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants.  For example,
3689                      A-C1-C2 is A-(C1 + C2), so if CODE == MINUS, we want PLUS.  */
3690 
3691                 associate_code = (is_shift || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
3692 
3693                 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
3694                                                                  canon_const_arg1,
3695                                                                  inner_const);
3696 
3697                 if (new_const == 0)
3698                     break;
3699 
3700                 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
3701                      produce a shift of the size of the object or larger.
3702                      This could occur when we follow a sign-extend by a right
3703                      shift on a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair
3704                      of shifts.  */
3705 
3706                 if (is_shift
3707                       && CONST_INT_P (new_const)
3708                       && INTVAL (new_const) >= GET_MODE_UNIT_PRECISION (mode))
3709                     {
3710                       /* As an exception, we can turn an ASHIFTRT of this
3711                          form into a shift of the number of bits - 1.  */
3712                       if (code == ASHIFTRT)
3713                         new_const = gen_int_shift_amount
3714                           (mode, GET_MODE_UNIT_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
3715                       else if (!side_effects_p (XEXP (y, 0)))
3716                         return CONST0_RTX (mode);
3717                       else
3718                         break;
3719                     }
3720 
3721                 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
3722 
3723                 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
3724                      can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
3725                      loop if we tried to fold it.  So don't in that case.  */
3726 
3727                 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
3728                     y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
3729 
3730                 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, y, new_const);
3731               }
3732             break;
3733 
3734           case DIV:       case UDIV:
3735             /* ??? The associative optimization performed immediately above is
3736                also possible for DIV and UDIV using associate_code of MULT.
3737                However, we would need extra code to verify that the
3738                multiplication does not overflow, that is, there is no overflow
3739                in the calculation of new_const.  */
3740             break;
3741 
3742           default:
3743             break;
3744           }
3745 
3746       new_rtx = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
3747                                                const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3748                                                const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
3749       break;
3750 
3751     case RTX_OBJ:
3752       /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X.  */
3753       if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
3754             && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
3755             && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
3756           return const_arg1;
3757       break;
3758 
3759     case RTX_TERNARY:
3760     case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
3761       new_rtx = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
3762                                                   const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
3763                                                   const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
3764                                                   const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
3765       break;
3766 
3767     default:
3768       break;
3769     }
3770 
3771   return new_rtx ? new_rtx : x;
3772 }
3773 
3774 /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
3775    Return 0 if we don't know one.  */
3776 
3777 static rtx
equiv_constant(rtx x)3778 equiv_constant (rtx x)
3779 {
3780   if (REG_P (x)
3781       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
3782     {
3783       int x_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
3784       struct qty_table_elem *x_ent = &qty_table[x_q];
3785 
3786       if (x_ent->const_rtx)
3787           x = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), x_ent->const_rtx);
3788     }
3789 
3790   if (x == 0 || CONSTANT_P (x))
3791     return x;
3792 
3793   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
3794     {
3795       machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
3796       machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
3797       rtx new_rtx;
3798 
3799       /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG.  */
3800       if ((new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
3801             || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_WIDE_INT)) != 0
3802             || (NUM_POLY_INT_COEFFS > 1
3803                 && (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_POLY_INT)) != 0)
3804           || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0
3805           || (new_rtx = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_FIXED)) != 0)
3806         return new_rtx;
3807 
3808       /* If we didn't and if doing so makes sense, see if we previously
3809            assigned a constant value to the enclosing word mode SUBREG.  */
3810       if (known_lt (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD)
3811             && known_lt (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (imode)))
3812           {
3813             poly_int64 byte = (SUBREG_BYTE (x)
3814                                    - subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, word_mode));
3815             if (known_ge (byte, 0) && multiple_p (byte, UNITS_PER_WORD))
3816               {
3817                 rtx y = gen_rtx_SUBREG (word_mode, SUBREG_REG (x), byte);
3818                 new_rtx = lookup_as_function (y, CONST_INT);
3819                 if (new_rtx)
3820                     return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
3821               }
3822           }
3823 
3824       /* Otherwise see if we already have a constant for the inner REG,
3825            and if that is enough to calculate an equivalent constant for
3826            the subreg.  Note that the upper bits of paradoxical subregs
3827            are undefined, so they cannot be said to equal anything.  */
3828       if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
3829             && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
3830             && (new_rtx = equiv_constant (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
3831         return simplify_subreg (mode, new_rtx, imode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
3832 
3833       return 0;
3834     }
3835 
3836   /* If X is a MEM, see if it is a constant-pool reference, or look it up in
3837      the hash table in case its value was seen before.  */
3838 
3839   if (MEM_P (x))
3840     {
3841       struct table_elt *elt;
3842 
3843       x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
3844       if (CONSTANT_P (x))
3845           return x;
3846 
3847       elt = lookup (x, SAFE_HASH (x, GET_MODE (x)), GET_MODE (x));
3848       if (elt == 0)
3849           return 0;
3850 
3851       for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
3852           if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
3853             return elt->exp;
3854     }
3855 
3856   return 0;
3857 }
3858 
3859 /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the
3860    "taken" branch.
3861 
3862    In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence.  For example,
3863    if we are following the taken case of
3864           if (i == 2)
3865    we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
3866 
3867    In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed.  If the same
3868    comparison is seen later, we will know its value.  */
3869 
3870 static void
record_jump_equiv(rtx_insn * insn,bool taken)3871 record_jump_equiv (rtx_insn *insn, bool taken)
3872 {
3873   int cond_known_true;
3874   rtx op0, op1;
3875   rtx set;
3876   machine_mode mode, mode0, mode1;
3877   int reversed_nonequality = 0;
3878   enum rtx_code code;
3879 
3880   /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn.  */
3881   gcc_assert (any_condjump_p (insn));
3882 
3883   set = pc_set (insn);
3884 
3885   /* See if this jump condition is known true or false.  */
3886   if (taken)
3887     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2) == pc_rtx);
3888   else
3889     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1) == pc_rtx);
3890 
3891   /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
3892      If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
3893      know that it isn't valid for floating-point.  */
3894   code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0));
3895   op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 0), insn);
3896   op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0), 1), insn);
3897 
3898   /* On a cc0 target the cc0-setter and cc0-user may end up in different
3899      blocks.  When that happens the tracking of the cc0-setter via
3900      PREV_INSN_CC0 is spoiled.  That means that fold_rtx may return
3901      NULL_RTX.  In those cases, there's nothing to record.  */
3902   if (op0 == NULL_RTX || op1 == NULL_RTX)
3903     return;
3904 
3905   code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1, &mode0, &mode1);
3906   if (! cond_known_true)
3907     {
3908       code = reversed_comparison_code_parts (code, op0, op1, insn);
3909 
3910       /* Don't remember if we can't find the inverse.  */
3911       if (code == UNKNOWN)
3912           return;
3913     }
3914 
3915   /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant.  */
3916   mode = mode0;
3917   if (mode1 != VOIDmode)
3918     mode = mode1;
3919 
3920   record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
3921 }
3922 
3923 /* Yet another form of subreg creation.  In this case, we want something in
3924    MODE, and we should assume OP has MODE iff it is naturally modeless.  */
3925 
3926 static rtx
record_jump_cond_subreg(machine_mode mode,rtx op)3927 record_jump_cond_subreg (machine_mode mode, rtx op)
3928 {
3929   machine_mode op_mode = GET_MODE (op);
3930   if (op_mode == mode || op_mode == VOIDmode)
3931     return op;
3932   return lowpart_subreg (mode, op, op_mode);
3933 }
3934 
3935 /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
3936    REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
3937    Make any useful entries we can with that information.  Called from
3938    above function and called recursively.  */
3939 
3940 static void
record_jump_cond(enum rtx_code code,machine_mode mode,rtx op0,rtx op1,int reversed_nonequality)3941 record_jump_cond (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode, rtx op0,
3942                       rtx op1, int reversed_nonequality)
3943 {
3944   unsigned op0_hash, op1_hash;
3945   int op0_in_memory, op1_in_memory;
3946   struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
3947 
3948   /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
3949      we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
3950      true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
3951      is not worth testing for with no SUBREG).  */
3952 
3953   /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE.  */
3954   if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
3955     {
3956       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
3957       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
3958       if (tem)
3959           record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
3960                                 reversed_nonequality);
3961     }
3962 
3963   if (code == EQ && paradoxical_subreg_p (op1))
3964     {
3965       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
3966       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
3967       if (tem)
3968           record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
3969                                 reversed_nonequality);
3970     }
3971 
3972   /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
3973      making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE.  */
3974 
3975   /* Note that GET_MODE (op0) may not equal MODE;
3976      if we test MODE instead, we can get an infinite recursion
3977      alternating between two modes each wider than MODE.  */
3978 
3979   if (code == NE
3980       && partial_subreg_p (op0)
3981       && subreg_lowpart_p (op0))
3982     {
3983       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
3984       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op1);
3985       if (tem)
3986           record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0), tem,
3987                                 reversed_nonequality);
3988     }
3989 
3990   if (code == NE
3991       && partial_subreg_p (op1)
3992       && subreg_lowpart_p (op1))
3993     {
3994       machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
3995       rtx tem = record_jump_cond_subreg (inner_mode, op0);
3996       if (tem)
3997           record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1), tem,
3998                                 reversed_nonequality);
3999     }
4000 
4001   /* Hash both operands.  */
4002 
4003   do_not_record = 0;
4004   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4005   op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
4006   op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4007 
4008   if (do_not_record)
4009     return;
4010 
4011   do_not_record = 0;
4012   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4013   op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4014   op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4015 
4016   if (do_not_record)
4017     return;
4018 
4019   /* Look up both operands.  */
4020   op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash, mode);
4021   op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
4022 
4023   /* If both operands are already equivalent or if they are not in the
4024      table but are identical, do nothing.  */
4025   if ((op0_elt != 0 && op1_elt != 0
4026        && op0_elt->first_same_value == op1_elt->first_same_value)
4027       || op0 == op1 || rtx_equal_p (op0, op1))
4028     return;
4029 
4030   /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
4031      comparison.   Similarly if this is floating-point.  In the latter
4032      case, OP1 might be zero and both -0.0 and 0.0 are equal to it.
4033      If we record the equality, we might inadvertently delete code
4034      whose intent was to change -0 to +0.  */
4035 
4036   if (code != EQ || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0)))
4037     {
4038       struct qty_table_elem *ent;
4039       int qty;
4040 
4041       /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
4042            register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
4043            do anything.  */
4044 
4045       if (!REG_P (op1))
4046           op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4047 
4048       if ((reversed_nonequality && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
4049             || !REG_P (op0) || op1 == 0)
4050           return;
4051 
4052       /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already.  This gives it a
4053            new quantity number.  */
4054       if (op0_elt == 0)
4055           {
4056             if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
4057               {
4058                 rehash_using_reg (op0);
4059                 op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
4060 
4061                 /* If OP0 is contained in OP1, this changes its hash code
4062                      as well.  Faster to rehash than to check, except
4063                      for the simple case of a constant.  */
4064                 if (! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4065                     op1_hash = HASH (op1,mode);
4066               }
4067 
4068             op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
4069             op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
4070           }
4071 
4072       qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op0));
4073       ent = &qty_table[qty];
4074 
4075       ent->comparison_code = code;
4076       if (REG_P (op1))
4077           {
4078             /* Look it up again--in case op0 and op1 are the same.  */
4079             op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash, mode);
4080 
4081             /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number.  */
4082             if (op1_elt == 0)
4083               {
4084                 if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
4085                     {
4086                       rehash_using_reg (op1);
4087                       op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4088                     }
4089 
4090                 op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
4091                 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
4092               }
4093 
4094             ent->comparison_const = NULL_RTX;
4095             ent->comparison_qty = REG_QTY (REGNO (op1));
4096           }
4097       else
4098           {
4099             ent->comparison_const = op1;
4100             ent->comparison_qty = -1;
4101           }
4102 
4103       return;
4104     }
4105 
4106   /* If either side is still missing an equivalence, make it now,
4107      then merge the equivalences.  */
4108 
4109   if (op0_elt == 0)
4110     {
4111       if (insert_regs (op0, NULL, 0))
4112           {
4113             rehash_using_reg (op0);
4114             op0_hash = HASH (op0, mode);
4115           }
4116 
4117       op0_elt = insert (op0, NULL, op0_hash, mode);
4118       op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
4119     }
4120 
4121   if (op1_elt == 0)
4122     {
4123       if (insert_regs (op1, NULL, 0))
4124           {
4125             rehash_using_reg (op1);
4126             op1_hash = HASH (op1, mode);
4127           }
4128 
4129       op1_elt = insert (op1, NULL, op1_hash, mode);
4130       op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
4131     }
4132 
4133   merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
4134 }
4135 
4136 /* CSE processing for one instruction.
4137 
4138    Most "true" common subexpressions are mostly optimized away in GIMPLE,
4139    but the few that "leak through" are cleaned up by cse_insn, and complex
4140    addressing modes are often formed here.
4141 
4142    The main function is cse_insn, and between here and that function
4143    a couple of helper functions is defined to keep the size of cse_insn
4144    within reasonable proportions.
4145 
4146    Data is shared between the main and helper functions via STRUCT SET,
4147    that contains all data related for every set in the instruction that
4148    is being processed.
4149 
4150    Note that cse_main processes all sets in the instruction.  Most
4151    passes in GCC only process simple SET insns or single_set insns, but
4152    CSE processes insns with multiple sets as well.  */
4153 
4154 /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction.  */
4155 
4156 struct set
4157 {
4158   /* The SET rtx itself.  */
4159   rtx rtl;
4160   /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing).  */
4161   rtx src;
4162   /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET.  */
4163   struct table_elt *src_elt;
4164   /* Hash value for the SET_SRC.  */
4165   unsigned src_hash;
4166   /* Hash value for the SET_DEST.  */
4167   unsigned dest_hash;
4168   /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped.  */
4169   rtx inner_dest;
4170   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory.  */
4171   char src_in_memory;
4172   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
4173      whose value cannot be predicted and understood.  */
4174   char src_volatile;
4175   /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.
4176      The size of this field should match the size of the mode
4177      field of struct rtx_def (see rtl.h).  */
4178   ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) mode : 8;
4179   /* Hash value of constant equivalent for SET_SRC.  */
4180   unsigned src_const_hash;
4181   /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
4182   rtx src_const;
4183   /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
4184   struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
4185   /* Table entry for the destination address.  */
4186   struct table_elt *dest_addr_elt;
4187 };
4188 
4189 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
4190    "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.  After cse, REG1 will probably not
4191    be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
4192    (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
4193    that computed their value.  Then REG1 will become a dead store
4194    and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
4195 
4196    Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
4197    then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
4198    into a three-operand insn.
4199 
4200    This is the last transformation that cse_insn will try to do.  */
4201 
4202 static void
try_back_substitute_reg(rtx set,rtx_insn * insn)4203 try_back_substitute_reg (rtx set, rtx_insn *insn)
4204 {
4205   rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
4206   rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
4207 
4208   if (REG_P (dest)
4209       && REG_P (src) && ! HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
4210       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (src)))
4211     {
4212       int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
4213       struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
4214 
4215       if (src_ent->first_reg == REGNO (dest))
4216           {
4217             /* Scan for the previous nonnote insn, but stop at a basic
4218                block boundary.  */
4219             rtx_insn *prev = insn;
4220             rtx_insn *bb_head = BB_HEAD (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn));
4221             do
4222               {
4223                 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
4224               }
4225             while (prev != bb_head && (NOTE_P (prev) || DEBUG_INSN_P (prev)));
4226 
4227             /* Do not swap the registers around if the previous instruction
4228                attaches a REG_EQUIV note to REG1.
4229 
4230                ??? It's not entirely clear whether we can transfer a REG_EQUIV
4231                from the pseudo that originally shadowed an incoming argument
4232                to another register.  Some uses of REG_EQUIV might rely on it
4233                being attached to REG1 rather than REG2.
4234 
4235                This section previously turned the REG_EQUIV into a REG_EQUAL
4236                note.  We cannot do that because REG_EQUIV may provide an
4237                uninitialized stack slot when REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE is used.  */
4238             if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
4239                 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
4240                 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == src
4241                 && ! find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX))
4242               {
4243                 rtx note;
4244 
4245                 validate_change (prev, &SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
4246                 validate_change (insn, &SET_DEST (set), src, 1);
4247                 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (set), dest, 1);
4248                 apply_change_group ();
4249 
4250                 /* If INSN has a REG_EQUAL note, and this note mentions
4251                      REG0, then we must delete it, because the value in
4252                      REG0 has changed.  If the note's value is REG1, we must
4253                      also delete it because that is now this insn's dest.  */
4254                 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
4255                 if (note != 0
4256                       && (reg_mentioned_p (dest, XEXP (note, 0))
4257                           || rtx_equal_p (src, XEXP (note, 0))))
4258                     remove_note (insn, note);
4259 
4260                 /* If INSN has a REG_ARGS_SIZE note, move it to PREV.  */
4261                 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX);
4262                 if (note != 0)
4263                     {
4264                       remove_note (insn, note);
4265                       gcc_assert (!find_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, NULL_RTX));
4266                       set_unique_reg_note (prev, REG_ARGS_SIZE, XEXP (note, 0));
4267                     }
4268               }
4269           }
4270     }
4271 }
4272 
4273 /* Record all the SETs in this instruction into SETS_PTR,
4274    and return the number of recorded sets.  */
4275 static int
find_sets_in_insn(rtx_insn * insn,struct set ** psets)4276 find_sets_in_insn (rtx_insn *insn, struct set **psets)
4277 {
4278   struct set *sets = *psets;
4279   int n_sets = 0;
4280   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4281 
4282   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
4283     {
4284       /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
4285            They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
4286            The reason is not efficiency but rather
4287            so that we can test at the end for instructions
4288            that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
4289            and not be misled by unchanged instructions
4290            that were unconditional jumps to begin with.  */
4291       if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
4292             && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
4293           ;
4294       /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
4295            The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
4296            someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing.  */
4297       else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
4298           ;
4299       else
4300           sets[n_sets++].rtl = x;
4301     }
4302   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4303     {
4304       int i, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
4305 
4306       /* Go over the expressions of the PARALLEL in forward order, to
4307            put them in the same order in the SETS array.  */
4308       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
4309           {
4310             rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
4311             if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
4312               {
4313                 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns and
4314                      ignore the result of apply_change_group.  */
4315                 if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
4316                       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
4317                     ;
4318                 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
4319                     ;
4320                 else
4321                     sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
4322               }
4323           }
4324     }
4325 
4326   return n_sets;
4327 }
4328 
4329 /* Subroutine of canonicalize_insn.  X is an ASM_OPERANDS in INSN.  */
4330 
4331 static void
canon_asm_operands(rtx x,rtx_insn * insn)4332 canon_asm_operands (rtx x, rtx_insn *insn)
4333 {
4334   for (int i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4335     {
4336       rtx input = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i);
4337       if (!(REG_P (input) && HARD_REGISTER_P (input)))
4338           {
4339             input = canon_reg (input, insn);
4340             validate_change (insn, &ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), input, 1);
4341           }
4342     }
4343 }
4344 
4345 /* Where possible, substitute every register reference in the N_SETS
4346    number of SETS in INSN with the canonical register.
4347 
4348    Register canonicalization propagatest the earliest register (i.e.
4349    one that is set before INSN) with the same value.  This is a very
4350    useful, simple form of CSE, to clean up warts from expanding GIMPLE
4351    to RTL.  For instance, a CONST for an address is usually expanded
4352    multiple times to loads into different registers, thus creating many
4353    subexpressions of the form:
4354 
4355    (set (reg1) (some_const))
4356    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4357    (set (reg2) (some_const))
4358    (set (mem (... reg2 ...) (thing)))
4359 
4360    After canonicalizing, the code takes the following form:
4361 
4362    (set (reg1) (some_const))
4363    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4364    (set (reg2) (some_const))
4365    (set (mem (... reg1 ...) (thing)))
4366 
4367    The set to reg2 is now trivially dead, and the memory reference (or
4368    address, or whatever) may be a candidate for further CSEing.
4369 
4370    In this function, the result of apply_change_group can be ignored;
4371    see canon_reg.  */
4372 
4373 static void
canonicalize_insn(rtx_insn * insn,struct set ** psets,int n_sets)4374 canonicalize_insn (rtx_insn *insn, struct set **psets, int n_sets)
4375 {
4376   struct set *sets = *psets;
4377   rtx tem;
4378   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4379   int i;
4380 
4381   if (CALL_P (insn))
4382     {
4383       for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
4384           if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) != SET)
4385             XEXP (tem, 0) = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4386     }
4387 
4388   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
4389     {
4390       canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
4391       apply_change_group ();
4392       fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
4393     }
4394   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
4395     {
4396       /* If we clobber memory, canon the address.
4397            This does nothing when a register is clobbered
4398            because we have already invalidated the reg.  */
4399       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
4400           canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), insn);
4401     }
4402   else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
4403              && ! (REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
4404                      && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4405     /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location.  */
4406     canon_reg (x, insn);
4407   else if (GET_CODE (x) == ASM_OPERANDS)
4408     canon_asm_operands (x, insn);
4409   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
4410     {
4411       canon_reg (x, insn);
4412       apply_change_group ();
4413       fold_rtx (x, insn);
4414     }
4415   else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
4416     canon_reg (PATTERN (insn), insn);
4417   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4418     {
4419       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4420           {
4421             rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
4422             if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
4423               {
4424                 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
4425                 apply_change_group ();
4426                 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
4427               }
4428             else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
4429               {
4430                 if (MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
4431                     canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), insn);
4432               }
4433             else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
4434                        && ! (REG_P (XEXP (y, 0))
4435                                && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
4436               canon_reg (y, insn);
4437             else if (GET_CODE (y) == ASM_OPERANDS)
4438               canon_asm_operands (y, insn);
4439             else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
4440               {
4441                 canon_reg (y, insn);
4442                 apply_change_group ();
4443                 fold_rtx (y, insn);
4444               }
4445           }
4446     }
4447 
4448   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
4449       && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
4450     {
4451       /* We potentially will process this insn many times.  Therefore,
4452            drop the REG_EQUAL note if it is equal to the SET_SRC of the
4453            unique set in INSN.
4454 
4455            Do not do so if the REG_EQUAL note is for a STRICT_LOW_PART,
4456            because cse_insn handles those specially.  */
4457       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != STRICT_LOW_PART
4458             && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
4459           remove_note (insn, tem);
4460       else
4461           {
4462             canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4463             apply_change_group ();
4464             XEXP (tem, 0) = fold_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0), insn);
4465             df_notes_rescan (insn);
4466           }
4467     }
4468 
4469   /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
4470      We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
4471      present in the insn pattern.  In that case, we want to ensure that
4472      we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern.  So we will replace
4473      both operands at the same time.  Otherwise, we would fail to find an
4474      equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
4475 
4476      We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
4477      but we don't do this any more.  */
4478 
4479   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
4480     {
4481       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
4482       rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
4483       rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (src, insn);
4484 
4485       validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
4486 
4487       if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
4488           {
4489             validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
4490                                  canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
4491             validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
4492                                  canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
4493           }
4494 
4495       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
4496                || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4497                || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4498           dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
4499 
4500       if (MEM_P (dest))
4501           canon_reg (dest, insn);
4502     }
4503 
4504   /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
4505      group and see if they all work.  Note that this will cause some
4506      canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
4507      because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
4508      occur often.
4509 
4510      The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see canon_reg.  */
4511 
4512   apply_change_group ();
4513 }
4514 
4515 /* Main function of CSE.
4516    First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
4517    in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
4518    Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
4519    of available values.  */
4520 
4521 static void
cse_insn(rtx_insn * insn)4522 cse_insn (rtx_insn *insn)
4523 {
4524   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
4525   int i;
4526   rtx tem;
4527   int n_sets = 0;
4528 
4529   rtx src_eqv = 0;
4530   struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
4531   int src_eqv_volatile = 0;
4532   int src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
4533   unsigned src_eqv_hash = 0;
4534 
4535   struct set *sets = (struct set *) 0;
4536 
4537   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
4538     sets = XALLOCA (struct set);
4539   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4540     sets = XALLOCAVEC (struct set, XVECLEN (x, 0));
4541 
4542   this_insn = insn;
4543   /* Records what this insn does to set CC0.  */
4544   this_insn_cc0 = 0;
4545   this_insn_cc0_mode = VOIDmode;
4546 
4547   /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
4548      to ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
4549      elsewhere in this insn.  */
4550   invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (insn);
4551 
4552   /* Record all the SETs in this instruction.  */
4553   n_sets = find_sets_in_insn (insn, &sets);
4554 
4555   /* Substitute the canonical register where possible.  */
4556   canonicalize_insn (insn, &sets, n_sets);
4557 
4558   /* If this insn has a REG_EQUAL note, store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV,
4559      if different, or if the DEST is a STRICT_LOW_PART/ZERO_EXTRACT.  The
4560      latter condition is necessary because SRC_EQV is handled specially for
4561      this case, and if it isn't set, then there will be no equivalence
4562      for the destination.  */
4563   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0
4564       && (tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX)) != 0)
4565     {
4566 
4567       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4568             && (! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
4569                 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART))
4570           src_eqv = copy_rtx (XEXP (tem, 0));
4571       /* If DEST is of the form ZERO_EXTACT, as in:
4572            (set (zero_extract:SI (reg:SI 119)
4573                       (const_int 16 [0x10])
4574                       (const_int 16 [0x10]))
4575                 (const_int 51154 [0xc7d2]))
4576            REG_EQUAL note will specify the value of register (reg:SI 119) at this
4577            point.  Note that this is different from SRC_EQV. We can however
4578            calculate SRC_EQV with the position and width of ZERO_EXTRACT.  */
4579       else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4580                  && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (tem, 0))
4581                  && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1))
4582                  && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2)))
4583           {
4584             rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 0);
4585             /* This is the mode of XEXP (tem, 0) as well.  */
4586             scalar_int_mode dest_mode
4587               = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
4588             rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 1);
4589             rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl), 2);
4590             HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (tem, 0));
4591             HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
4592             unsigned int shift;
4593             if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4594               shift = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
4595                          - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width));
4596             else
4597               shift = INTVAL (pos);
4598             if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
4599               mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
4600             else
4601               mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
4602             val = (val >> shift) & mask;
4603             src_eqv = GEN_INT (val);
4604           }
4605     }
4606 
4607   /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
4608      Detect assignments from or to volatile things
4609      and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
4610      in the rest of this function.
4611 
4612      Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains.  */
4613 
4614   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
4615     {
4616       bool repeat = false;
4617       bool mem_noop_insn = false;
4618       rtx src, dest;
4619       rtx src_folded;
4620       struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
4621       machine_mode mode;
4622       rtx src_eqv_here;
4623       rtx src_const = 0;
4624       rtx src_related = 0;
4625       bool src_related_is_const_anchor = false;
4626       struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
4627       int src_cost = MAX_COST;
4628       int src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
4629       int src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
4630       int src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
4631       int src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
4632       int src_regcost = MAX_COST;
4633       int src_eqv_regcost = MAX_COST;
4634       int src_folded_regcost = MAX_COST;
4635       int src_related_regcost = MAX_COST;
4636       int src_elt_regcost = MAX_COST;
4637       /* Set nonzero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
4638            contents of src_folded before using it.  */
4639       int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
4640       scalar_int_mode int_mode;
4641 
4642       dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
4643       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
4644 
4645       /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
4646            hash it with the destination's machine mode.
4647            This way we can keep different modes separate.  */
4648 
4649       mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
4650       sets[i].mode = mode;
4651 
4652       if (src_eqv)
4653           {
4654             machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
4655             if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4656               eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
4657             do_not_record = 0;
4658             hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4659             src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
4660 
4661             /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression.  */
4662 
4663             if (!do_not_record)
4664               src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
4665 
4666             src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
4667             src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4668           }
4669 
4670       /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
4671            value of the INNER register, not the destination.  So it is not
4672            a valid substitution for the source.  But save it for later.  */
4673       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
4674           src_eqv_here = 0;
4675       else
4676           src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
4677 
4678       /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC.  Then get the fully-
4679            simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid.  */
4680       src_folded = fold_rtx (src, NULL);
4681 
4682 #if 0
4683       /* ??? This caused bad code to be generated for the m68k port with -O2.
4684            Suppose src is (CONST_INT -1), and that after truncation src_folded
4685            is (CONST_INT 3).  Suppose src_folded is then used for src_const.
4686            At the end we will add src and src_const to the same equivalence
4687            class.  We now have 3 and -1 on the same equivalence class.  This
4688            causes later instructions to be mis-optimized.  */
4689       /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
4690            so we will be able to record it later.  */
4691       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
4692           {
4693             rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
4694 
4695             if (CONST_INT_P (src)
4696                 && CONST_INT_P (width)
4697                 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
4698                 && (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << INTVAL (width))))
4699               src_folded
4700                 = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) & ((HOST_WIDE_INT_1
4701                                                     << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
4702           }
4703 #endif
4704 
4705       /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
4706            should not be recorded at all.  In that case,
4707            prevent any further processing of this assignment.  */
4708       do_not_record = 0;
4709       hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
4710 
4711       sets[i].src = src;
4712       sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
4713       sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
4714       sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
4715 
4716       /* If SRC is a MEM, there is a REG_EQUIV note for SRC, and DEST is
4717            a pseudo, do not record SRC.  Using SRC as a replacement for
4718            anything else will be incorrect in that situation.  Note that
4719            this usually occurs only for stack slots, in which case all the
4720            RTL would be referring to SRC, so we don't lose any optimization
4721            opportunities by not having SRC in the hash table.  */
4722 
4723       if (MEM_P (src)
4724             && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, NULL_RTX) != 0
4725             && REG_P (dest)
4726             && REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
4727           sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4728 
4729       else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
4730                  && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
4731           {
4732             /* Do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm with
4733                more than one result.  */
4734             if (n_sets > 1)
4735               sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4736 
4737             int j, lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
4738             for (j = 0; j < lim; j++)
4739               {
4740                 rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, j);
4741                 /* And do not record result of a non-volatile inline asm
4742                      with "memory" clobber.  */
4743                 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER && MEM_P (XEXP (y, 0)))
4744                     {
4745                       sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4746                       break;
4747                     }
4748               }
4749           }
4750 
4751 #if 0
4752       /* It is no longer clear why we used to do this, but it doesn't
4753            appear to still be needed.  So let's try without it since this
4754            code hurts cse'ing widened ops.  */
4755       /* If source is a paradoxical subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
4756            treat it as volatile.  It may do the work of an SI in one context
4757            where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
4758            in general.  */
4759       if (paradoxical_subreg_p (src))
4760           sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
4761 #endif
4762 
4763       /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC.  Try to replace
4764          SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
4765 
4766          We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
4767          version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
4768            to a constant.
4769 
4770          Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
4771          of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
4772          the same class; we check for this).
4773 
4774            If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
4775 
4776          We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
4777          REG_NOTE.  */
4778 
4779       if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
4780           elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
4781 
4782       sets[i].src_elt = elt;
4783 
4784       if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
4785           {
4786             if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
4787               {
4788                 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
4789                      classes are now equivalent.  So merge them.  */
4790                 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
4791                 src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
4792                 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash, elt->mode);
4793               }
4794 
4795             src_eqv_here = 0;
4796           }
4797 
4798       else if (src_eqv_elt)
4799           elt = src_eqv_elt;
4800 
4801       /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
4802            Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'.  Look in
4803            any known equivalences first.  (If the constant is not in the
4804            table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash').  */
4805       if (elt)
4806           for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
4807             if (p->is_const)
4808               {
4809                 src_const = p->exp;
4810                 src_const_elt = elt;
4811                 break;
4812               }
4813 
4814       if (src_const == 0
4815             && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
4816                 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
4817                      "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
4818                      to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used.  */
4819                 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
4820                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
4821                       && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
4822           src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
4823       else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
4824           src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
4825 
4826       /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
4827            hash code and look it up.  */
4828       if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
4829           {
4830             sets[i].src_const_hash = HASH (src_const, mode);
4831             src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
4832           }
4833 
4834       sets[i].src_const = src_const;
4835       sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
4836 
4837       /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
4838            equivalent.  Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
4839            isn't, set ELT to it.  */
4840       if (src_const_elt && elt
4841             && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
4842           merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
4843       else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
4844           elt = src_const_elt;
4845 
4846       /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
4847          equivalent of SRC.  */
4848       if (src_const
4849             && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
4850                 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
4851           {
4852             src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
4853             if (src_related)
4854               {
4855                 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
4856                     = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
4857                 if (src_related_elt && elt)
4858                     {
4859                       if (elt->first_same_value
4860                           != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
4861                         /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
4862                            involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
4863                            twice.  Merge the involved classes.  */
4864                         merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
4865 
4866                       src_related = 0;
4867                       src_related_elt = 0;
4868                     }
4869                 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
4870                     elt = src_related_elt;
4871               }
4872           }
4873 
4874       /* See if we have a CONST_INT that is already in a register in a
4875            wider mode.  */
4876 
4877       if (src_const && src_related == 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
4878             && is_int_mode (mode, &int_mode)
4879             && GET_MODE_PRECISION (int_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
4880           {
4881             opt_scalar_int_mode wider_mode_iter;
4882             FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (wider_mode_iter, int_mode)
4883               {
4884                 scalar_int_mode wider_mode = wider_mode_iter.require ();
4885                 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
4886                     break;
4887 
4888                 struct table_elt *const_elt
4889                     = lookup (src_const, HASH (src_const, wider_mode), wider_mode);
4890 
4891                 if (const_elt == 0)
4892                     continue;
4893 
4894                 for (const_elt = const_elt->first_same_value;
4895                        const_elt; const_elt = const_elt->next_same_value)
4896                     if (REG_P (const_elt->exp))
4897                       {
4898                         src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, const_elt->exp);
4899                         break;
4900                       }
4901 
4902                 if (src_related != 0)
4903                     break;
4904               }
4905           }
4906 
4907       /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
4908            a mode narrower than a word.  If so, it might have been generated
4909            as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND.  If we already
4910            have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
4911            value.  */
4912 
4913       if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
4914             && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
4915             && GET_CODE (src) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
4916             && GET_MODE_SIZE (int_mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
4917           {
4918             opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
4919             rtx new_and = gen_rtx_AND (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, XEXP (src, 1));
4920 
4921             FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
4922               {
4923                 scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
4924                 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
4925                     break;
4926 
4927                 rtx inner = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
4928                 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
4929 
4930                 if (inner)
4931                     {
4932                       PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
4933                       XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
4934                       larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
4935                       if (larger_elt == 0)
4936                         continue;
4937 
4938                       for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
4939                            larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
4940                         if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
4941                           {
4942                               src_related
4943                                 = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
4944                               break;
4945                           }
4946 
4947                       if (src_related)
4948                         break;
4949                     }
4950               }
4951           }
4952 
4953       /* See if a MEM has already been loaded with a widening operation;
4954            if it has, we can use a subreg of that.  Many CISC machines
4955            also have such operations, but this is only likely to be
4956            beneficial on these machines.  */
4957 
4958       rtx_code extend_op;
4959       if (flag_expensive_optimizations && src_related == 0
4960             && MEM_P (src) && ! do_not_record
4961             && is_a <scalar_int_mode> (mode, &int_mode)
4962             && (extend_op = load_extend_op (int_mode)) != UNKNOWN)
4963           {
4964             struct rtx_def memory_extend_buf;
4965             rtx memory_extend_rtx = &memory_extend_buf;
4966 
4967             /* Set what we are trying to extend and the operation it might
4968                have been extended with.  */
4969             memset (memory_extend_rtx, 0, sizeof (*memory_extend_rtx));
4970             PUT_CODE (memory_extend_rtx, extend_op);
4971             XEXP (memory_extend_rtx, 0) = src;
4972 
4973             opt_scalar_int_mode tmode_iter;
4974             FOR_EACH_WIDER_MODE (tmode_iter, int_mode)
4975               {
4976                 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
4977 
4978                 scalar_int_mode tmode = tmode_iter.require ();
4979                 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
4980                     break;
4981 
4982                 PUT_MODE (memory_extend_rtx, tmode);
4983                 larger_elt = lookup (memory_extend_rtx,
4984                                            HASH (memory_extend_rtx, tmode), tmode);
4985                 if (larger_elt == 0)
4986                     continue;
4987 
4988                 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
4989                        larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
4990                     if (REG_P (larger_elt->exp))
4991                       {
4992                         src_related = gen_lowpart (int_mode, larger_elt->exp);
4993                         break;
4994                       }
4995 
4996                 if (src_related)
4997                     break;
4998               }
4999           }
5000 
5001       /* Try to express the constant using a register+offset expression
5002            derived from a constant anchor.  */
5003 
5004       if (targetm.const_anchor
5005             && !src_related
5006             && src_const
5007             && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT)
5008           {
5009             src_related = try_const_anchors (src_const, mode);
5010             src_related_is_const_anchor = src_related != NULL_RTX;
5011           }
5012 
5013 
5014       if (src == src_folded)
5015           src_folded = 0;
5016 
5017       /* At this point, ELT, if nonzero, points to a class of expressions
5018          equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
5019            and SRC_RELATED, if nonzero, each contain additional equivalent
5020            expressions.  Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
5021            already in the equivalence class.
5022 
5023            Check for an equivalent identical to the destination.  If found,
5024            this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
5025            elimination of the insn.  Indicate this by placing it in
5026            `src_related'.  */
5027 
5028       if (elt)
5029           elt = elt->first_same_value;
5030       for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5031           {
5032             enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
5033 
5034             /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it.  Then we do not
5035                have to check for validity below.  In most cases, we can use
5036                `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done.  */
5037             if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, false))
5038               continue;
5039 
5040             /* Also skip paradoxical subregs, unless that's what we're
5041                looking for.  */
5042             if (paradoxical_subreg_p (p->exp)
5043                 && ! (src != 0
5044                         && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5045                         && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (p->exp)
5046                         && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
5047                                                    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (p->exp)))))
5048               continue;
5049 
5050             if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
5051               src = 0;
5052             else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
5053                        && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
5054               src_folded = 0;
5055             else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
5056                        && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
5057               src_eqv_here = 0;
5058             else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
5059                        && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
5060               src_related = 0;
5061 
5062             /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
5063                to prefer it.  Copy it to src_related.  The code below will
5064                then give it a negative cost.  */
5065             if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
5066               src_related = dest;
5067           }
5068 
5069       /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
5070          possibilities.  Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
5071          that are when they are equal cost.  Note that we can never
5072          worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
5073            If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
5074            since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case.  */
5075       if (src)
5076           {
5077             if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
5078               src_cost = src_regcost = -1;
5079             else
5080               {
5081                 src_cost = COST (src, mode);
5082                 src_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src);
5083               }
5084           }
5085 
5086       if (src_eqv_here)
5087           {
5088             if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
5089               src_eqv_cost = src_eqv_regcost = -1;
5090             else
5091               {
5092                 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here, mode);
5093                 src_eqv_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_eqv_here);
5094               }
5095           }
5096 
5097       if (src_folded)
5098           {
5099             if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
5100               src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
5101             else
5102               {
5103                 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded, mode);
5104                 src_folded_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_folded);
5105               }
5106           }
5107 
5108       if (src_related)
5109           {
5110             if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
5111               src_related_cost = src_related_regcost = -1;
5112             else
5113               {
5114                 src_related_cost = COST (src_related, mode);
5115                 src_related_regcost = approx_reg_cost (src_related);
5116 
5117                 /* If a const-anchor is used to synthesize a constant that
5118                      normally requires multiple instructions then slightly prefer
5119                      it over the original sequence.  These instructions are likely
5120                      to become redundant now.  We can't compare against the cost
5121                      of src_eqv_here because, on MIPS for example, multi-insn
5122                      constants have zero cost; they are assumed to be hoisted from
5123                      loops.  */
5124                 if (src_related_is_const_anchor
5125                       && src_related_cost == src_cost
5126                       && src_eqv_here)
5127                     src_related_cost--;
5128               }
5129           }
5130 
5131       /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
5132            cheaper even though it looks more expensive.  */
5133       if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
5134           src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = src_folded_regcost = -1;
5135 
5136       /* Terminate loop when replacement made.  This must terminate since
5137          the current contents will be tested and will always be valid.  */
5138       while (1)
5139           {
5140             rtx trial;
5141 
5142             /* Skip invalid entries.  */
5143             while (elt && !REG_P (elt->exp)
5144                      && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
5145               elt = elt->next_same_value;
5146 
5147             /* A paradoxical subreg would be bad here: it'll be the right
5148                size, but later may be adjusted so that the upper bits aren't
5149                what we want.  So reject it.  */
5150             if (elt != 0
5151                 && paradoxical_subreg_p (elt->exp)
5152                 /* It is okay, though, if the rtx we're trying to match
5153                      will ignore any of the bits we can't predict.  */
5154                 && ! (src != 0
5155                         && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5156                         && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (elt->exp)
5157                         && partial_subreg_p (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
5158                                                    GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (elt->exp)))))
5159               {
5160                 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5161                 continue;
5162               }
5163 
5164             if (elt)
5165               {
5166                 src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
5167                 src_elt_regcost = elt->regcost;
5168               }
5169 
5170             /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time.   For items
5171                of equal cost, use this order:
5172                src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry.  */
5173             if (src_folded
5174                 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5175                                    src_cost, src_regcost) <= 0
5176                 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5177                                    src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
5178                 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5179                                    src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5180                 && preferable (src_folded_cost, src_folded_regcost,
5181                                    src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5182               {
5183                 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = MAX_COST;
5184                 if (src_folded_force_flag)
5185                     {
5186                       rtx forced = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
5187                       if (forced)
5188                         trial = forced;
5189                     }
5190               }
5191             else if (src
5192                        && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5193                                           src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost) <= 0
5194                        && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5195                                           src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5196                        && preferable (src_cost, src_regcost,
5197                                           src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5198               trial = src, src_cost = MAX_COST;
5199             else if (src_eqv_here
5200                        && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
5201                                           src_related_cost, src_related_regcost) <= 0
5202                        && preferable (src_eqv_cost, src_eqv_regcost,
5203                                           src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5204               trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = MAX_COST;
5205             else if (src_related
5206                        && preferable (src_related_cost, src_related_regcost,
5207                                           src_elt_cost, src_elt_regcost) <= 0)
5208               trial = src_related, src_related_cost = MAX_COST;
5209             else
5210               {
5211                 trial = elt->exp;
5212                 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5213                 src_elt_cost = MAX_COST;
5214               }
5215 
5216             /* Avoid creation of overlapping memory moves.  */
5217             if (MEM_P (trial) && MEM_P (dest) && !rtx_equal_p (trial, dest))
5218               {
5219                 rtx src, dest;
5220 
5221                 /* BLKmode moves are not handled by cse anyway.  */
5222                 if (GET_MODE (trial) == BLKmode)
5223                     break;
5224 
5225                 src = canon_rtx (trial);
5226                 dest = canon_rtx (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
5227 
5228                 if (!MEM_P (src) || !MEM_P (dest)
5229                       || !nonoverlapping_memrefs_p (src, dest, false))
5230                     break;
5231               }
5232 
5233             /* Try to optimize
5234                (set (reg:M N) (const_int A))
5235                (set (reg:M2 O) (const_int B))
5236                (set (zero_extract:M2 (reg:M N) (const_int C) (const_int D))
5237                       (reg:M2 O)).  */
5238             if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5239                 && CONST_INT_P (trial)
5240                 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
5241                 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
5242                 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0))
5243                 && (known_ge
5244                       (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))),
5245                        INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))))
5246                 && ((unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1))
5247                       + (unsigned) INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2))
5248                       <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))
5249               {
5250                 rtx dest_reg = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 0);
5251                 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5252                 rtx pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 2);
5253                 unsigned int dest_hash = HASH (dest_reg, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5254                 struct table_elt *dest_elt
5255                     = lookup (dest_reg, dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5256                 rtx dest_cst = NULL;
5257 
5258                 if (dest_elt)
5259                     for (p = dest_elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5260                       if (p->is_const && CONST_INT_P (p->exp))
5261                         {
5262                           dest_cst = p->exp;
5263                           break;
5264                         }
5265                 if (dest_cst)
5266                     {
5267                       HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (dest_cst);
5268                       HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
5269                       unsigned int shift;
5270                       /* This is the mode of DEST_CST as well.  */
5271                       scalar_int_mode dest_mode
5272                         = as_a <scalar_int_mode> (GET_MODE (dest_reg));
5273                       if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
5274                         shift = GET_MODE_PRECISION (dest_mode)
5275                                   - INTVAL (pos) - INTVAL (width);
5276                       else
5277                         shift = INTVAL (pos);
5278                       if (INTVAL (width) == HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
5279                         mask = HOST_WIDE_INT_M1;
5280                       else
5281                         mask = (HOST_WIDE_INT_1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1;
5282                       val &= ~(mask << shift);
5283                       val |= (INTVAL (trial) & mask) << shift;
5284                       val = trunc_int_for_mode (val, dest_mode);
5285                       validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl),
5286                                                      dest_reg, 1);
5287                       validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5288                                                      GEN_INT (val), 1);
5289                       if (apply_change_group ())
5290                         {
5291                           rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
5292                           if (note)
5293                               {
5294                                 remove_note (insn, note);
5295                                 df_notes_rescan (insn);
5296                               }
5297                           src_eqv = NULL_RTX;
5298                           src_eqv_elt = NULL;
5299                           src_eqv_volatile = 0;
5300                           src_eqv_in_memory = 0;
5301                           src_eqv_hash = 0;
5302                           repeat = true;
5303                           break;
5304                         }
5305                     }
5306               }
5307 
5308             /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
5309                check for this separately here.  We will delete such an
5310                insn below.
5311 
5312                For other cases such as a table jump or conditional jump
5313                where we know the ultimate target, go ahead and replace the
5314                operand.  While that may not make a valid insn, we will
5315                reemit the jump below (and also insert any necessary
5316                barriers).  */
5317             if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
5318                 && (trial == pc_rtx
5319                       || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5320                           && ! condjump_p (insn))))
5321               {
5322                 /* Don't substitute non-local labels, this confuses CFG.  */
5323                 if (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
5324                       && LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (trial))
5325                     continue;
5326 
5327                 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5328                 cse_jumps_altered = true;
5329                 break;
5330               }
5331 
5332             /* Similarly, lots of targets don't allow no-op
5333                (set (mem x) (mem x)) moves.  */
5334             else if (n_sets == 1
5335                        && MEM_P (trial)
5336                        && MEM_P (dest)
5337                        && rtx_equal_p (trial, dest)
5338                        && !side_effects_p (dest)
5339                        && (cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions
5340                            || insn_nothrow_p (insn)))
5341               {
5342                 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
5343                 mem_noop_insn = true;
5344                 break;
5345               }
5346 
5347             /* Reject certain invalid forms of CONST that we create.  */
5348             else if (CONSTANT_P (trial)
5349                        && GET_CODE (trial) == CONST
5350                        /* Reject cases that will cause decode_rtx_const to
5351                           die.  On the alpha when simplifying a switch, we
5352                           get (const (truncate (minus (label_ref)
5353                           (label_ref)))).  */
5354                        && (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == TRUNCATE
5355                            /* Likewise on IA-64, except without the
5356                                 truncate.  */
5357                            || (GET_CODE (XEXP (trial, 0)) == MINUS
5358                                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
5359                                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (trial, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5360               /* Do nothing for this case.  */
5361               ;
5362 
5363             /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn.  */
5364             else if (validate_unshare_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5365                                                       trial, 0))
5366               {
5367                 rtx new_rtx = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
5368 
5369                 /* The result of apply_change_group can be ignored; see
5370                      canon_reg.  */
5371 
5372                 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_rtx, 1);
5373                 apply_change_group ();
5374 
5375                 break;
5376               }
5377 
5378             /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
5379                constants and this is a constant, try making a
5380                pool entry.  Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
5381                this since that is where it likely came from.  */
5382 
5383             else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
5384                        && CONSTANT_P (trial)
5385                        && (src_folded == 0
5386                            || (!MEM_P (src_folded)
5387                                  && ! src_folded_force_flag))
5388                        && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC
5389                        && mode != VOIDmode)
5390               {
5391                 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
5392                 src_folded = trial;
5393                 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
5394                 src_folded_regcost = constant_pool_entries_regcost;
5395               }
5396           }
5397 
5398       /* If we changed the insn too much, handle this set from scratch.  */
5399       if (repeat)
5400           {
5401             i--;
5402             continue;
5403           }
5404 
5405       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5406 
5407       /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
5408            However, there is an important exception:  If both are registers
5409            that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
5410            with the head of the class.  If we do not do this, we will have
5411            both registers live over a portion of the basic block.  This way,
5412            their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping.  */
5413       if (REG_P (dest)
5414             && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest)))
5415           {
5416             int dest_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (dest));
5417             struct qty_table_elem *dest_ent = &qty_table[dest_q];
5418 
5419             if (dest_ent->mode == GET_MODE (dest)
5420                 && dest_ent->first_reg != REGNO (dest)
5421                 && REG_P (src) && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
5422                 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
5423                      SET_SRC or SET_DEST.  */
5424                 && (!REG_P (sets[i].src)
5425                       || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5426                 && (!REG_P (dest) || REGNO (dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5427               /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
5428                  SRC is a hard register.  */
5429               {
5430                 int src_q = REG_QTY (REGNO (src));
5431                 struct qty_table_elem *src_ent = &qty_table[src_q];
5432                 int first = src_ent->first_reg;
5433                 rtx new_src
5434                     = (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5435                        ? regno_reg_rtx[first] : gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (src), first));
5436 
5437                 /* We must use validate-change even for this, because this
5438                      might be a special no-op instruction, suitable only to
5439                      tag notes onto.  */
5440                 if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new_src, 0))
5441                     {
5442                       src = new_src;
5443                       /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
5444                          setting SRC to, use that constant.  We ignored it when we
5445                          thought we could make this into a no-op.  */
5446                       if (src_const && COST (src_const, mode) < COST (src, mode)
5447                           && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl),
5448                                                     src_const, 0))
5449                         src = src_const;
5450                     }
5451               }
5452           }
5453 
5454       /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values.  */
5455       if (src != sets[i].src)
5456           {
5457             do_not_record = 0;
5458             hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5459             sets[i].src = src;
5460             sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
5461             sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5462             sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5463             sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
5464           }
5465 
5466       /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
5467            equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_EQUAL note if the constant
5468            is different from the source.  We don't want to do it for a constant
5469            pseudo since verifying that this pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a
5470            pain; moreover such a note won't help anything.
5471 
5472            Avoid a REG_EQUAL note for (CONST (MINUS (LABEL_REF) (LABEL_REF)))
5473            which can be created for a reference to a compile time computable
5474            entry in a jump table.  */
5475       if (n_sets == 1
5476             && REG_P (dest)
5477             && src_const
5478             && !REG_P (src_const)
5479             && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == SUBREG
5480                  && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (src_const)))
5481             && !(GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5482                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_const, 0)) == MINUS
5483                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
5484                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (src_const, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
5485             && !rtx_equal_p (src, src_const))
5486           {
5487             /* Make sure that the rtx is not shared.  */
5488             src_const = copy_rtx (src_const);
5489 
5490             /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note,
5491                making a new one if one does not already exist.  */
5492             set_unique_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, src_const);
5493             df_notes_rescan (insn);
5494           }
5495 
5496       /* Now deal with the destination.  */
5497       do_not_record = 0;
5498 
5499       /* Look within any ZERO_EXTRACT to the MEM or REG within it.  */
5500       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
5501                || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5502                || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5503           dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5504 
5505       sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
5506 
5507       if (MEM_P (dest))
5508           {
5509 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
5510             /* Stack pushes invalidate the stack pointer.  */
5511             rtx addr = XEXP (dest, 0);
5512             if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (addr)) == RTX_AUTOINC
5513                 && XEXP (addr, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
5514               invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx, VOIDmode);
5515 #endif
5516             dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
5517           }
5518 
5519       /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
5520            before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
5521            since the register values used in the address computation
5522            are those before this instruction.  */
5523       sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, mode);
5524 
5525       /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
5526            because the value in it after the store
5527            may not equal what was stored, due to truncation.  */
5528 
5529       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5530           {
5531             rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5532 
5533             if (src_const != 0 && CONST_INT_P (src_const)
5534                 && CONST_INT_P (width)
5535                 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
5536                 && ! (INTVAL (src_const)
5537                         & (HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << INTVAL (width))))
5538               /* Exception: if the value is constant,
5539                  and it won't be truncated, record it.  */
5540               ;
5541             else
5542               {
5543                 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
5544                      but no new value will be recorded.
5545                      We must invalidate because sometimes constant
5546                      values can be recorded for bitfields.  */
5547                 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
5548                 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
5549                 src_eqv = 0;
5550                 src_eqv_elt = 0;
5551               }
5552           }
5553 
5554       /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
5555            the insn.  */
5556       else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
5557           {
5558             /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to.  */
5559             cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5560             cse_jumps_altered = true;
5561             /* No more processing for this set.  */
5562             sets[i].rtl = 0;
5563           }
5564 
5565       /* Similarly for no-op MEM moves.  */
5566       else if (mem_noop_insn)
5567           {
5568             if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && can_throw_internal (insn))
5569               cse_cfg_altered = true;
5570             cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5571             /* No more processing for this set.  */
5572             sets[i].rtl = 0;
5573           }
5574 
5575       /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
5576            be a conditional or computed branch.  */
5577       else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF
5578                  && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (src))
5579           {
5580             /* We reemit the jump in as many cases as possible just in
5581                case the form of an unconditional jump is significantly
5582                different than a computed jump or conditional jump.
5583 
5584                If this insn has multiple sets, then reemitting the
5585                jump is nontrivial.  So instead we just force rerecognition
5586                and hope for the best.  */
5587             if (n_sets == 1)
5588               {
5589                 rtx_jump_insn *new_rtx;
5590                 rtx note;
5591 
5592                 rtx_insn *seq = targetm.gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0));
5593                 new_rtx = emit_jump_insn_before (seq, insn);
5594                 JUMP_LABEL (new_rtx) = XEXP (src, 0);
5595                 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
5596 
5597                 /* Make sure to copy over REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO.  */
5598                 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, 0);
5599                 if (note)
5600                     {
5601                       XEXP (note, 1) = NULL_RTX;
5602                       REG_NOTES (new_rtx) = note;
5603                     }
5604 
5605                 cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
5606                 insn = new_rtx;
5607               }
5608             else
5609               INSN_CODE (insn) = -1;
5610 
5611             /* Do not bother deleting any unreachable code, let jump do it.  */
5612             cse_jumps_altered = true;
5613             sets[i].rtl = 0;
5614           }
5615 
5616       /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
5617            processing for this assignment.  */
5618 
5619       else if (do_not_record)
5620           {
5621             invalidate_dest (dest);
5622             sets[i].rtl = 0;
5623           }
5624 
5625       if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
5626           {
5627             do_not_record = 0;
5628             sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
5629             if (do_not_record)
5630               {
5631                 invalidate_dest (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
5632                 sets[i].rtl = 0;
5633               }
5634           }
5635 
5636       /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
5637            is equivalent to a constant.  If it is being set to a floating-point
5638            value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0.  If we
5639            don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
5640            const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
5641            insn as a floating-point operand.  */
5642       if (dest == cc0_rtx)
5643           {
5644             this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
5645             this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
5646             if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))
5647               this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx_COMPARE (VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
5648                                                        CONST0_RTX (mode));
5649           }
5650     }
5651 
5652   /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
5653      if they are not already present.
5654      Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
5655      This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
5656      the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
5657      (having been invalidated).  */
5658 
5659   if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
5660       && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
5661     {
5662       struct table_elt *elt;
5663       struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
5664       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
5665       machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
5666 
5667       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5668           {
5669             eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5670             classp = 0;
5671           }
5672       if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
5673           {
5674             rehash_using_reg (src_eqv);
5675             src_eqv_hash = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5676           }
5677       elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash, eqvmode);
5678       elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
5679       src_eqv_elt = elt;
5680 
5681       /* Check to see if src_eqv_elt is the same as a set source which
5682            does not yet have an elt, and if so set the elt of the set source
5683            to src_eqv_elt.  */
5684       for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5685           if (sets[i].rtl && sets[i].src_elt == 0
5686               && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_eqv))
5687             sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5688     }
5689 
5690   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5691     if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
5692           && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
5693       {
5694           if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5695             {
5696               /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
5697                  gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
5698                  not just for the subreg being stored in now.
5699                  This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
5700                  to treat the entire reg as the destination.  */
5701               sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5702               sets[i].src_hash = src_eqv_hash;
5703             }
5704           else
5705             {
5706               /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
5707                  already present.  */
5708               struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
5709               rtx src = sets[i].src;
5710               rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5711               machine_mode mode
5712                 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5713 
5714               /* It's possible that we have a source value known to be
5715                  constant but don't have a REG_EQUAL note on the insn.
5716                  Lack of a note will mean src_eqv_elt will be NULL.  This
5717                  can happen where we've generated a SUBREG to access a
5718                  CONST_INT that is already in a register in a wider mode.
5719                  Ensure that the source expression is put in the proper
5720                  constant class.  */
5721               if (!classp)
5722                 classp = sets[i].src_const_elt;
5723 
5724               if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5725                 {
5726                     struct table_elt *elt;
5727 
5728                     /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
5729                        any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
5730                        match if not still valid.  */
5731                     if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
5732                       {
5733                         rehash_using_reg (src);
5734                         sets[i].src_hash = HASH (src, mode);
5735                       }
5736                     elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash, mode);
5737                     elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
5738                     /* If inline asm has any clobbers, ensure we only reuse
5739                        existing inline asms and never try to put the ASM_OPERANDS
5740                        into an insn that isn't inline asm.  */
5741                     if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
5742                         && GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5743                       elt->cost = MAX_COST;
5744                     sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
5745                 }
5746               if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
5747                     && src != sets[i].src_const
5748                     && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
5749                 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
5750                                                   sets[i].src_const_hash, mode);
5751             }
5752       }
5753     else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5754       /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
5755            volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
5756            so that the destination goes into that class.  */
5757       sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5758 
5759   /* Record destination addresses in the hash table.  This allows us to
5760      check if they are invalidated by other sets.  */
5761   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5762     {
5763       if (sets[i].rtl)
5764           {
5765             rtx x = sets[i].inner_dest;
5766             struct table_elt *elt;
5767             machine_mode mode;
5768             unsigned hash;
5769 
5770             if (MEM_P (x))
5771               {
5772                 x = XEXP (x, 0);
5773                 mode = GET_MODE (x);
5774                 hash = HASH (x, mode);
5775                 elt = lookup (x, hash, mode);
5776                 if (!elt)
5777                     {
5778                       if (insert_regs (x, NULL, 0))
5779                         {
5780                           rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5781 
5782                           rehash_using_reg (x);
5783                           hash = HASH (x, mode);
5784                           sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
5785                         }
5786                       elt = insert (x, NULL, hash, mode);
5787                     }
5788 
5789                 sets[i].dest_addr_elt = elt;
5790               }
5791             else
5792               sets[i].dest_addr_elt = NULL;
5793           }
5794     }
5795 
5796   invalidate_from_clobbers (insn);
5797 
5798   /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls.  Memory is
5799      invalidated by non-constant calls.  */
5800 
5801   if (CALL_P (insn))
5802     {
5803       if (!(RTL_CONST_OR_PURE_CALL_P (insn)))
5804           invalidate_memory ();
5805       else
5806           /* For const/pure calls, invalidate any argument slots, because
5807              those are owned by the callee.  */
5808           for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
5809             if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == USE
5810                 && MEM_P (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0)))
5811               invalidate (XEXP (XEXP (tem, 0), 0), VOIDmode);
5812       invalidate_for_call ();
5813     }
5814 
5815   /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
5816      If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
5817      sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
5818      a part of which is being set.  */
5819 
5820   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5821     if (sets[i].rtl)
5822       {
5823           /* We can't use the inner dest, because the mode associated with
5824              a ZERO_EXTRACT is significant.  */
5825           rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5826 
5827           /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
5828              previous quantity's chain.
5829              Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
5830              we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those.  */
5831           if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
5832             invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
5833           else if (MEM_P (dest))
5834             invalidate (dest, VOIDmode);
5835           else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5836                      || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5837             invalidate (XEXP (dest, 0), GET_MODE (dest));
5838       }
5839 
5840   /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg VAX)
5841      the regs restored by the longjmp come from a later time
5842      than the setjmp.  */
5843   if (CALL_P (insn) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_SETJMP, NULL))
5844     {
5845       flush_hash_table ();
5846       goto done;
5847     }
5848 
5849   /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
5850      are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
5851      This removes from the hash table
5852      any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
5853 
5854      We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
5855      we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally.  */
5856 
5857   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5858     {
5859       if (sets[i].rtl)
5860           {
5861             rtx x = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5862 
5863             if (!REG_P (x))
5864               mention_regs (x);
5865             else
5866               {
5867                 /* We used to rely on all references to a register becoming
5868                      inaccessible when a register changes to a new quantity,
5869                      since that changes the hash code.  However, that is not
5870                      safe, since after HASH_SIZE new quantities we get a
5871                      hash 'collision' of a register with its own invalid
5872                      entries.  And since SUBREGs have been changed not to
5873                      change their hash code with the hash code of the register,
5874                      it wouldn't work any longer at all.  So we have to check
5875                      for any invalid references lying around now.
5876                      This code is similar to the REG case in mention_regs,
5877                      but it knows that reg_tick has been incremented, and
5878                      it leaves reg_in_table as -1 .  */
5879                 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
5880                 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
5881                 unsigned int i;
5882 
5883                 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
5884                     {
5885                       if (REG_IN_TABLE (i) >= 0)
5886                         {
5887                           remove_invalid_refs (i);
5888                           REG_IN_TABLE (i) = -1;
5889                         }
5890                     }
5891               }
5892           }
5893     }
5894 
5895   /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
5896      So replace each one with the current head of the same class.
5897      Also check if destination addresses have been removed.  */
5898 
5899   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5900     if (sets[i].rtl)
5901       {
5902           if (sets[i].dest_addr_elt
5903               && sets[i].dest_addr_elt->first_same_value == 0)
5904             {
5905               /* The elt was removed, which means this destination is not
5906                  valid after this instruction.  */
5907               sets[i].rtl = NULL_RTX;
5908             }
5909           else if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
5910             /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
5911                or 0 if nothing remains of that class.  */
5912             {
5913               struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
5914 
5915               while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
5916                 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
5917 
5918               while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
5919                 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5920               sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
5921             }
5922       }
5923 
5924   /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes.  */
5925 
5926   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5927     if (sets[i].rtl)
5928       {
5929           rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5930           struct table_elt *elt;
5931 
5932           /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
5933              floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
5934              memory.  */
5935           if ((flag_float_store
5936                && MEM_P (dest)
5937                && FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest)))
5938               /* Don't record BLKmode values, because we don't know the
5939                  size of it, and can't be sure that other BLKmode values
5940                  have the same or smaller size.  */
5941               || GET_MODE (dest) == BLKmode
5942               /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
5943                  table, there is no point is recording DEST.  */
5944               || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
5945             continue;
5946 
5947           /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
5948              and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
5949              Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT.  */
5950           if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5951             dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
5952 
5953           if (REG_P (dest) || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
5954             /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities.  */
5955             if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
5956               {
5957                 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
5958                      recalculated.  */
5959                 rehash_using_reg (dest);
5960                 sets[i].dest_hash = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
5961               }
5962 
5963           /* If DEST is a paradoxical SUBREG, don't record DEST since the bits
5964              outside the mode of GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)) are undefined.  */
5965           if (paradoxical_subreg_p (dest))
5966             continue;
5967 
5968           elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
5969                           sets[i].dest_hash, GET_MODE (dest));
5970 
5971           /* If this is a constant, insert the constant anchors with the
5972              equivalent register-offset expressions using register DEST.  */
5973           if (targetm.const_anchor
5974               && REG_P (dest)
5975               && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (dest))
5976               && GET_CODE (sets[i].src_elt->exp) == CONST_INT)
5977             insert_const_anchors (dest, sets[i].src_elt->exp, GET_MODE (dest));
5978 
5979           elt->in_memory = (MEM_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
5980                                 && !MEM_READONLY_P (sets[i].inner_dest));
5981 
5982           /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
5983              narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
5984              we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
5985              make that equivalence as well.
5986 
5987              However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart
5988              will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart applied to
5989              BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
5990              BAR's equivalences.  If we don't get a simplified form, make
5991              the SUBREG.  It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
5992              cause two similar assignments to be detected.
5993 
5994              Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
5995              already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table.  */
5996 
5997           if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
5998               && (known_equal_after_align_down
5999                     (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) - 1,
6000                      GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) - 1,
6001                      UNITS_PER_WORD))
6002               && !partial_subreg_p (dest)
6003               && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6004             {
6005               machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6006               struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6007 
6008               for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6009                      elt = elt->next_same_value)
6010                 {
6011                     rtx new_src = 0;
6012                     unsigned src_hash;
6013                     struct table_elt *src_elt;
6014 
6015                     /* Ignore invalid entries.  */
6016                     if (!REG_P (elt->exp)
6017                         && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, false))
6018                       continue;
6019 
6020                     /* We may have already been playing subreg games.  If the
6021                        mode is already correct for the destination, use it.  */
6022                     if (GET_MODE (elt->exp) == new_mode)
6023                       new_src = elt->exp;
6024                     else
6025                       {
6026                         poly_uint64 byte
6027                           = subreg_lowpart_offset (new_mode, GET_MODE (dest));
6028                         new_src = simplify_gen_subreg (new_mode, elt->exp,
6029                                                              GET_MODE (dest), byte);
6030                       }
6031 
6032                     /* The call to simplify_gen_subreg fails if the value
6033                        is VOIDmode, yet we can't do any simplification, e.g.
6034                        for EXPR_LISTs denoting function call results.
6035                        It is invalid to construct a SUBREG with a VOIDmode
6036                        SUBREG_REG, hence a zero new_src means we can't do
6037                        this substitution.  */
6038                     if (! new_src)
6039                       continue;
6040 
6041                     src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6042                     src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6043 
6044                     /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6045                        already.  */
6046                     if (src_elt == 0)
6047                       {
6048                         if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6049                           {
6050                               rehash_using_reg (new_src);
6051                               src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6052                           }
6053                         src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6054                         src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6055                         if (GET_CODE (new_src) == ASM_OPERANDS
6056                               && elt->cost == MAX_COST)
6057                           src_elt->cost = MAX_COST;
6058                       }
6059                     else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6060                       /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6061                          actually the same.  */
6062                       merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6063 
6064                     classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6065                     /* Ignore invalid entries.  */
6066                     while (classp
6067                            && !REG_P (classp->exp)
6068                            && ! exp_equiv_p (classp->exp, classp->exp, 1, false))
6069                       classp = classp->next_same_value;
6070                 }
6071             }
6072       }
6073 
6074   /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1) where REG0 is the
6075      "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.  After cse, REG1 will probably not
6076      be used in the sequel, so (if easily done) change this insn to
6077      (set REG1 REG0) and replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn
6078      that computed their value.  Then REG1 will become a dead store
6079      and won't cloud the situation for later optimizations.
6080 
6081      Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6082      then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6083      into a three-operand insn.
6084 
6085      Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN.  */
6086 
6087   if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl)
6088     try_back_substitute_reg (sets[0].rtl, insn);
6089 
6090 done:;
6091 }
6092 
6093 /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory.  */
6094 
6095 static void
invalidate_memory(void)6096 invalidate_memory (void)
6097 {
6098   int i;
6099   struct table_elt *p, *next;
6100 
6101   for (i = 0; i < HASH_SIZE; i++)
6102     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
6103       {
6104           next = p->next_same_hash;
6105           if (p->in_memory)
6106             remove_from_table (p, i);
6107       }
6108 }
6109 
6110 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN,
6111    except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6112    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6113    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.  */
6114 
6115 static void
invalidate_from_clobbers(rtx_insn * insn)6116 invalidate_from_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
6117 {
6118   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
6119 
6120   if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6121     {
6122       rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6123       if (ref)
6124           {
6125             if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6126                 || MEM_P (ref))
6127               invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
6128             else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6129                        || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6130               invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
6131           }
6132     }
6133   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6134     {
6135       int i;
6136       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6137           {
6138             rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6139             if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6140               {
6141                 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6142                 if (REG_P (ref) || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6143                       || MEM_P (ref))
6144                     invalidate (ref, VOIDmode);
6145                 else if (GET_CODE (ref) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6146                            || GET_CODE (ref) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6147                     invalidate (XEXP (ref, 0), GET_MODE (ref));
6148               }
6149           }
6150     }
6151 }
6152 
6153 /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about INSN.
6154    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6155    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.  */
6156 
6157 static void
invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers(rtx_insn * insn)6158 invalidate_from_sets_and_clobbers (rtx_insn *insn)
6159 {
6160   rtx tem;
6161   rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
6162 
6163   if (CALL_P (insn))
6164     {
6165       for (tem = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); tem; tem = XEXP (tem, 1))
6166           if (GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER)
6167             invalidate (SET_DEST (XEXP (tem, 0)), VOIDmode);
6168     }
6169 
6170   /* Ensure we invalidate the destination register of a CALL insn.
6171      This is necessary for machines where this register is a fixed_reg,
6172      because no other code would invalidate it.  */
6173   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
6174     invalidate (SET_DEST (x), VOIDmode);
6175 
6176   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6177     {
6178       int i;
6179 
6180       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6181           {
6182             rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6183             if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6184               {
6185                 rtx clobbered = XEXP (y, 0);
6186 
6187                 if (REG_P (clobbered)
6188                       || GET_CODE (clobbered) == SUBREG)
6189                     invalidate (clobbered, VOIDmode);
6190                 else if (GET_CODE (clobbered) == STRICT_LOW_PART
6191                            || GET_CODE (clobbered) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
6192                     invalidate (XEXP (clobbered, 0), GET_MODE (clobbered));
6193               }
6194             else if (GET_CODE (y) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
6195               invalidate (SET_DEST (y), VOIDmode);
6196           }
6197     }
6198 }
6199 
6200 /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn.  Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
6201    and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
6202    or the canonical form of the register.  If we are inside an address,
6203    only do this if the address remains valid.
6204 
6205    OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
6206 
6207    Return the replacement for X.  */
6208 
6209 static rtx
cse_process_notes_1(rtx x,rtx object,bool * changed)6210 cse_process_notes_1 (rtx x, rtx object, bool *changed)
6211 {
6212   enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6213   const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6214   int i;
6215 
6216   switch (code)
6217     {
6218     case CONST:
6219     case SYMBOL_REF:
6220     case LABEL_REF:
6221     CASE_CONST_ANY:
6222     case PC:
6223     case CC0:
6224     case LO_SUM:
6225       return x;
6226 
6227     case MEM:
6228       validate_change (x, &XEXP (x, 0),
6229                            cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x, changed), 0);
6230       return x;
6231 
6232     case EXPR_LIST:
6233       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
6234           XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX, changed);
6235       /* Fall through.  */
6236 
6237     case INSN_LIST:
6238     case INT_LIST:
6239       if (XEXP (x, 1))
6240           XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX, changed);
6241       return x;
6242 
6243     case SIGN_EXTEND:
6244     case ZERO_EXTEND:
6245     case SUBREG:
6246       {
6247           rtx new_rtx = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object, changed);
6248           /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6249              since they would impede folding.  */
6250           if (GET_MODE (new_rtx) != VOIDmode)
6251             validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx, 0);
6252           return x;
6253       }
6254 
6255     case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
6256       {
6257           rtx new_rtx = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object, changed);
6258           /* We don't substitute negative VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6259              since they would impede folding.  */
6260           if (GET_MODE (new_rtx) != VOIDmode
6261               || (CONST_INT_P (new_rtx) && INTVAL (new_rtx) >= 0)
6262               || (CONST_DOUBLE_P (new_rtx) && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (new_rtx) >= 0))
6263             validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx, 0);
6264           return x;
6265       }
6266 
6267     case REG:
6268       i = REG_QTY (REGNO (x));
6269 
6270       /* Return a constant or a constant register.  */
6271       if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
6272           {
6273             struct qty_table_elem *ent = &qty_table[i];
6274 
6275             if (ent->const_rtx != NULL_RTX
6276                 && (CONSTANT_P (ent->const_rtx)
6277                       || REG_P (ent->const_rtx)))
6278               {
6279                 rtx new_rtx = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), ent->const_rtx);
6280                 if (new_rtx)
6281                     return copy_rtx (new_rtx);
6282               }
6283           }
6284 
6285       /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register.  */
6286       return canon_reg (x, NULL);
6287 
6288     default:
6289       break;
6290     }
6291 
6292   for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
6293     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6294       validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
6295                            cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object, changed), 0);
6296 
6297   return x;
6298 }
6299 
6300 static rtx
cse_process_notes(rtx x,rtx object,bool * changed)6301 cse_process_notes (rtx x, rtx object, bool *changed)
6302 {
6303   rtx new_rtx = cse_process_notes_1 (x, object, changed);
6304   if (new_rtx != x)
6305     *changed = true;
6306   return new_rtx;
6307 }
6308 
6309 
6310 /* Find a path in the CFG, starting with FIRST_BB to perform CSE on.
6311 
6312    DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, that is used to
6313    describe the path.
6314    It is filled with a queue of basic blocks, starting with FIRST_BB
6315    and following a trace through the CFG.
6316 
6317    If all paths starting at FIRST_BB have been followed, or no new path
6318    starting at FIRST_BB can be constructed, this function returns FALSE.
6319    Otherwise, DATA->path is filled and the function returns TRUE indicating
6320    that a path to follow was found.
6321 
6322    If FOLLOW_JUMPS is false, the maximum path length is 1 and the only
6323    block in the path will be FIRST_BB.  */
6324 
6325 static bool
cse_find_path(basic_block first_bb,struct cse_basic_block_data * data,int follow_jumps)6326 cse_find_path (basic_block first_bb, struct cse_basic_block_data *data,
6327                  int follow_jumps)
6328 {
6329   basic_block bb;
6330   edge e;
6331   int path_size;
6332 
6333   bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, first_bb->index);
6334 
6335   /* See if there is a previous path.  */
6336   path_size = data->path_size;
6337 
6338   /* There is a previous path.  Make sure it started with FIRST_BB.  */
6339   if (path_size)
6340     gcc_assert (data->path[0].bb == first_bb);
6341 
6342   /* There was only one basic block in the last path.  Clear the path and
6343      return, so that paths starting at another basic block can be tried.  */
6344   if (path_size == 1)
6345     {
6346       path_size = 0;
6347       goto done;
6348     }
6349 
6350   /* If the path was empty from the beginning, construct a new path.  */
6351   if (path_size == 0)
6352     data->path[path_size++].bb = first_bb;
6353   else
6354     {
6355       /* Otherwise, path_size must be equal to or greater than 2, because
6356            a previous path exists that is at least two basic blocks long.
6357 
6358            Update the previous branch path, if any.  If the last branch was
6359            previously along the branch edge, take the fallthrough edge now.  */
6360       while (path_size >= 2)
6361           {
6362             basic_block last_bb_in_path, previous_bb_in_path;
6363             edge e;
6364 
6365             --path_size;
6366             last_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size].bb;
6367             previous_bb_in_path = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
6368 
6369             /* If we previously followed a path along the branch edge, try
6370                the fallthru edge now.  */
6371             if (EDGE_COUNT (previous_bb_in_path->succs) == 2
6372                 && any_condjump_p (BB_END (previous_bb_in_path))
6373                 && (e = find_edge (previous_bb_in_path, last_bb_in_path))
6374                 && e == BRANCH_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path))
6375               {
6376                 bb = FALLTHRU_EDGE (previous_bb_in_path)->dest;
6377                 if (bb != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
6378                       && single_pred_p (bb)
6379                       /* We used to assert here that we would only see blocks
6380                          that we have not visited yet.  But we may end up
6381                          visiting basic blocks twice if the CFG has changed
6382                          in this run of cse_main, because when the CFG changes
6383                          the topological sort of the CFG also changes.  A basic
6384                          blocks that previously had more than two predecessors
6385                          may now have a single predecessor, and become part of
6386                          a path that starts at another basic block.
6387 
6388                          We still want to visit each basic block only once, so
6389                          halt the path here if we have already visited BB.  */
6390                       && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index))
6391                     {
6392                       bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index);
6393                       data->path[path_size++].bb = bb;
6394                       break;
6395                     }
6396               }
6397 
6398             data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
6399           }
6400 
6401       /* If only one block remains in the path, bail.  */
6402       if (path_size == 1)
6403           {
6404             path_size = 0;
6405             goto done;
6406           }
6407     }
6408 
6409   /* Extend the path if possible.  */
6410   if (follow_jumps)
6411     {
6412       bb = data->path[path_size - 1].bb;
6413       while (bb && path_size < PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_PATH_LENGTH))
6414           {
6415             if (single_succ_p (bb))
6416               e = single_succ_edge (bb);
6417             else if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
6418                        && any_condjump_p (BB_END (bb)))
6419               {
6420                 /* First try to follow the branch.  If that doesn't lead
6421                      to a useful path, follow the fallthru edge.  */
6422                 e = BRANCH_EDGE (bb);
6423                 if (!single_pred_p (e->dest))
6424                     e = FALLTHRU_EDGE (bb);
6425               }
6426             else
6427               e = NULL;
6428 
6429             if (e
6430                 && !((e->flags & EDGE_ABNORMAL_CALL) && cfun->has_nonlocal_label)
6431                 && e->dest != EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
6432                 && single_pred_p (e->dest)
6433                 /* Avoid visiting basic blocks twice.  The large comment
6434                      above explains why this can happen.  */
6435                 && !bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, e->dest->index))
6436               {
6437                 basic_block bb2 = e->dest;
6438                 bitmap_set_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb2->index);
6439                 data->path[path_size++].bb = bb2;
6440                 bb = bb2;
6441               }
6442             else
6443               bb = NULL;
6444           }
6445     }
6446 
6447 done:
6448   data->path_size = path_size;
6449   return path_size != 0;
6450 }
6451 
6452 /* Dump the path in DATA to file F.  NSETS is the number of sets
6453    in the path.  */
6454 
6455 static void
cse_dump_path(struct cse_basic_block_data * data,int nsets,FILE * f)6456 cse_dump_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data, int nsets, FILE *f)
6457 {
6458   int path_entry;
6459 
6460   fprintf (f, ";; Following path with %d sets: ", nsets);
6461   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < data->path_size; path_entry++)
6462     fprintf (f, "%d ", (data->path[path_entry].bb)->index);
6463   fputc ('\n', dump_file);
6464   fflush (f);
6465 }
6466 
6467 
6468 /* Return true if BB has exception handling successor edges.  */
6469 
6470 static bool
have_eh_succ_edges(basic_block bb)6471 have_eh_succ_edges (basic_block bb)
6472 {
6473   edge e;
6474   edge_iterator ei;
6475 
6476   FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
6477     if (e->flags & EDGE_EH)
6478       return true;
6479 
6480   return false;
6481 }
6482 
6483 
6484 /* Scan to the end of the path described by DATA.  Return an estimate of
6485    the total number of SETs of all insns in the path.  */
6486 
6487 static void
cse_prescan_path(struct cse_basic_block_data * data)6488 cse_prescan_path (struct cse_basic_block_data *data)
6489 {
6490   int nsets = 0;
6491   int path_size = data->path_size;
6492   int path_entry;
6493 
6494   /* Scan to end of each basic block in the path.  */
6495   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
6496     {
6497       basic_block bb;
6498       rtx_insn *insn;
6499 
6500       bb = data->path[path_entry].bb;
6501 
6502       FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
6503           {
6504             if (!INSN_P (insn))
6505               continue;
6506 
6507             /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
6508                especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS.  */
6509             if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6510               nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0);
6511             else
6512               nsets += 1;
6513           }
6514     }
6515 
6516   data->nsets = nsets;
6517 }
6518 
6519 /* Return true if the pattern of INSN uses a LABEL_REF for which
6520    there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND note.  */
6521 
6522 static bool
check_for_label_ref(rtx_insn * insn)6523 check_for_label_ref (rtx_insn *insn)
6524 {
6525   /* If this insn uses a LABEL_REF and there isn't a REG_LABEL_OPERAND
6526      note for it, we must rerun jump since it needs to place the note.  If
6527      this is a LABEL_REF for a CODE_LABEL that isn't in the insn chain,
6528      don't do this since no REG_LABEL_OPERAND will be added.  */
6529   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
6530   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, PATTERN (insn), ALL)
6531     {
6532       const_rtx x = *iter;
6533       if (GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF
6534             && !LABEL_REF_NONLOCAL_P (x)
6535             && (!JUMP_P (insn)
6536                 || !label_is_jump_target_p (label_ref_label (x), insn))
6537             && LABEL_P (label_ref_label (x))
6538             && INSN_UID (label_ref_label (x)) != 0
6539             && !find_reg_note (insn, REG_LABEL_OPERAND, label_ref_label (x)))
6540           return true;
6541     }
6542   return false;
6543 }
6544 
6545 /* Process a single extended basic block described by EBB_DATA.  */
6546 
6547 static void
cse_extended_basic_block(struct cse_basic_block_data * ebb_data)6548 cse_extended_basic_block (struct cse_basic_block_data *ebb_data)
6549 {
6550   int path_size = ebb_data->path_size;
6551   int path_entry;
6552   int num_insns = 0;
6553 
6554   /* Allocate the space needed by qty_table.  */
6555   qty_table = XNEWVEC (struct qty_table_elem, max_qty);
6556 
6557   new_basic_block ();
6558   cse_ebb_live_in = df_get_live_in (ebb_data->path[0].bb);
6559   cse_ebb_live_out = df_get_live_out (ebb_data->path[path_size - 1].bb);
6560   for (path_entry = 0; path_entry < path_size; path_entry++)
6561     {
6562       basic_block bb;
6563       rtx_insn *insn;
6564 
6565       bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry].bb;
6566 
6567       /* Invalidate recorded information for eh regs if there is an EH
6568            edge pointing to that bb.  */
6569       if (bb_has_eh_pred (bb))
6570           {
6571             df_ref def;
6572 
6573             FOR_EACH_ARTIFICIAL_DEF (def, bb->index)
6574               if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_AT_TOP)
6575                 invalidate (DF_REF_REG (def), GET_MODE (DF_REF_REG (def)));
6576           }
6577 
6578       optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (bb);
6579       FOR_BB_INSNS (bb, insn)
6580           {
6581             /* If we have processed 1,000 insns, flush the hash table to
6582                avoid extreme quadratic behavior.  We must not include NOTEs
6583                in the count since there may be more of them when generating
6584                debugging information.  If we clear the table at different
6585                times, code generated with -g -O might be different than code
6586                generated with -O but not -g.
6587 
6588                FIXME: This is a real kludge and needs to be done some other
6589                         way.  */
6590             if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
6591                 && num_insns++ > PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_INSNS))
6592               {
6593                 flush_hash_table ();
6594                 num_insns = 0;
6595               }
6596 
6597             if (INSN_P (insn))
6598               {
6599                 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms
6600                      when looking for duplicate operations.  */
6601                 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
6602                     {
6603                       bool changed = false;
6604                       REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn),
6605                                                                     NULL_RTX, &changed);
6606                       if (changed)
6607                         df_notes_rescan (insn);
6608                     }
6609 
6610                 cse_insn (insn);
6611 
6612                 /* If we haven't already found an insn where we added a LABEL_REF,
6613                      check this one.  */
6614                 if (INSN_P (insn) && !recorded_label_ref
6615                       && check_for_label_ref (insn))
6616                     recorded_label_ref = true;
6617 
6618                 if (HAVE_cc0 && NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
6619                     {
6620                       /* If the previous insn sets CC0 and this insn no
6621                          longer references CC0, delete the previous insn.
6622                          Here we use fact that nothing expects CC0 to be
6623                          valid over an insn, which is true until the final
6624                          pass.  */
6625                       rtx_insn *prev_insn;
6626                       rtx tem;
6627 
6628                       prev_insn = prev_nonnote_nondebug_insn (insn);
6629                       if (prev_insn && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev_insn)
6630                           && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != NULL_RTX
6631                           && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
6632                           && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (insn)))
6633                         delete_insn (prev_insn);
6634 
6635                       /* If this insn is not the last insn in the basic
6636                          block, it will be PREV_INSN(insn) in the next
6637                          iteration.  If we recorded any CC0-related
6638                          information for this insn, remember it.  */
6639                       if (insn != BB_END (bb))
6640                         {
6641                           prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
6642                           prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
6643                         }
6644                     }
6645               }
6646           }
6647 
6648       /* With non-call exceptions, we are not always able to update
6649            the CFG properly inside cse_insn.  So clean up possibly
6650            redundant EH edges here.  */
6651       if (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions && have_eh_succ_edges (bb))
6652           cse_cfg_altered |= purge_dead_edges (bb);
6653 
6654       /* If we changed a conditional jump, we may have terminated
6655            the path we are following.  Check that by verifying that
6656            the edge we would take still exists.  If the edge does
6657            not exist anymore, purge the remainder of the path.
6658            Note that this will cause us to return to the caller.  */
6659       if (path_entry < path_size - 1)
6660           {
6661             basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
6662             if (!find_edge (bb, next_bb))
6663               {
6664                 do
6665                     {
6666                       path_size--;
6667 
6668                       /* If we truncate the path, we must also reset the
6669                          visited bit on the remaining blocks in the path,
6670                          or we will never visit them at all.  */
6671                       bitmap_clear_bit (cse_visited_basic_blocks,
6672                                    ebb_data->path[path_size].bb->index);
6673                       ebb_data->path[path_size].bb = NULL;
6674                     }
6675                 while (path_size - 1 != path_entry);
6676                 ebb_data->path_size = path_size;
6677               }
6678           }
6679 
6680       /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known
6681            equivalences due to the condition being tested.  */
6682       insn = BB_END (bb);
6683       if (path_entry < path_size - 1
6684             && EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 2
6685             && JUMP_P (insn)
6686             && single_set (insn)
6687             && any_condjump_p (insn))
6688           {
6689             basic_block next_bb = ebb_data->path[path_entry + 1].bb;
6690             bool taken = (next_bb == BRANCH_EDGE (bb)->dest);
6691             record_jump_equiv (insn, taken);
6692           }
6693 
6694       /* Clear the CC0-tracking related insns, they can't provide
6695            useful information across basic block boundaries.  */
6696       prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
6697     }
6698 
6699   gcc_assert (next_qty <= max_qty);
6700 
6701   free (qty_table);
6702 }
6703 
6704 
6705 /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
6706    F is the first instruction.
6707    NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
6708 
6709    Return 2 if jump optimizations should be redone due to simplifications
6710    in conditional jump instructions.
6711    Return 1 if the CFG should be cleaned up because it has been modified.
6712    Return 0 otherwise.  */
6713 
6714 static int
cse_main(rtx_insn * f ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,int nregs)6715 cse_main (rtx_insn *f ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int nregs)
6716 {
6717   struct cse_basic_block_data ebb_data;
6718   basic_block bb;
6719   int *rc_order = XNEWVEC (int, last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
6720   int i, n_blocks;
6721 
6722   /* CSE doesn't use dominane info but can invalidate it in different ways.
6723      For simplicity free dominance info here.  */
6724   free_dominance_info (CDI_DOMINATORS);
6725 
6726   df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE);
6727   df_note_add_problem ();
6728   df_analyze ();
6729   df_set_flags (DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
6730 
6731   reg_scan (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
6732   init_cse_reg_info (nregs);
6733 
6734   ebb_data.path = XNEWVEC (struct branch_path,
6735                                  PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_CSE_PATH_LENGTH));
6736 
6737   cse_cfg_altered = false;
6738   cse_jumps_altered = false;
6739   recorded_label_ref = false;
6740   constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
6741   constant_pool_entries_regcost = 0;
6742   ebb_data.path_size = 0;
6743   ebb_data.nsets = 0;
6744   rtl_hooks = cse_rtl_hooks;
6745 
6746   init_recog ();
6747   init_alias_analysis ();
6748 
6749   reg_eqv_table = XNEWVEC (struct reg_eqv_elem, nregs);
6750 
6751   /* Set up the table of already visited basic blocks.  */
6752   cse_visited_basic_blocks = sbitmap_alloc (last_basic_block_for_fn (cfun));
6753   bitmap_clear (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
6754 
6755   /* Loop over basic blocks in reverse completion order (RPO),
6756      excluding the ENTRY and EXIT blocks.  */
6757   n_blocks = pre_and_rev_post_order_compute (NULL, rc_order, false);
6758   i = 0;
6759   while (i < n_blocks)
6760     {
6761       /* Find the first block in the RPO queue that we have not yet
6762            processed before.  */
6763       do
6764           {
6765             bb = BASIC_BLOCK_FOR_FN (cfun, rc_order[i++]);
6766           }
6767       while (bitmap_bit_p (cse_visited_basic_blocks, bb->index)
6768                && i < n_blocks);
6769 
6770       /* Find all paths starting with BB, and process them.  */
6771       while (cse_find_path (bb, &ebb_data, flag_cse_follow_jumps))
6772           {
6773             /* Pre-scan the path.  */
6774             cse_prescan_path (&ebb_data);
6775 
6776             /* If this basic block has no sets, skip it.  */
6777             if (ebb_data.nsets == 0)
6778               continue;
6779 
6780             /* Get a reasonable estimate for the maximum number of qty's
6781                needed for this path.  For this, we take the number of sets
6782                and multiply that by MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS.  */
6783             max_qty = ebb_data.nsets * MAX_RECOG_OPERANDS;
6784 
6785             /* Dump the path we're about to process.  */
6786             if (dump_file)
6787               cse_dump_path (&ebb_data, ebb_data.nsets, dump_file);
6788 
6789             cse_extended_basic_block (&ebb_data);
6790           }
6791     }
6792 
6793   /* Clean up.  */
6794   end_alias_analysis ();
6795   free (reg_eqv_table);
6796   free (ebb_data.path);
6797   sbitmap_free (cse_visited_basic_blocks);
6798   free (rc_order);
6799   rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
6800 
6801   if (cse_jumps_altered || recorded_label_ref)
6802     return 2;
6803   else if (cse_cfg_altered)
6804     return 1;
6805   else
6806     return 0;
6807 }
6808 
6809 /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
6810    COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
6811    we count each register usage.
6812 
6813    Don't count a usage of DEST, which is the SET_DEST of a SET which
6814    contains X in its SET_SRC.  This is because such a SET does not
6815    modify the liveness of DEST.
6816    DEST is set to pc_rtx for a trapping insn, or for an insn with side effects.
6817    We must then count uses of a SET_DEST regardless, because the insn can't be
6818    deleted here.  */
6819 
6820 static void
count_reg_usage(rtx x,int * counts,rtx dest,int incr)6821 count_reg_usage (rtx x, int *counts, rtx dest, int incr)
6822 {
6823   enum rtx_code code;
6824   rtx note;
6825   const char *fmt;
6826   int i, j;
6827 
6828   if (x == 0)
6829     return;
6830 
6831   switch (code = GET_CODE (x))
6832     {
6833     case REG:
6834       if (x != dest)
6835           counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
6836       return;
6837 
6838     case PC:
6839     case CC0:
6840     case CONST:
6841     CASE_CONST_ANY:
6842     case SYMBOL_REF:
6843     case LABEL_REF:
6844       return;
6845 
6846     case CLOBBER:
6847       /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any registers inside the address
6848          as being used.  */
6849       if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6850           count_reg_usage (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6851       return;
6852 
6853     case SET:
6854       /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST.  */
6855       if (!REG_P (SET_DEST (x)))
6856           count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6857       count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts,
6858                            dest ? dest : SET_DEST (x),
6859                            incr);
6860       return;
6861 
6862     case DEBUG_INSN:
6863       return;
6864 
6865     case CALL_INSN:
6866     case INSN:
6867     case JUMP_INSN:
6868       /* We expect dest to be NULL_RTX here.  If the insn may throw,
6869            or if it cannot be deleted due to side-effects, mark this fact
6870            by setting DEST to pc_rtx.  */
6871       if ((!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (x))
6872             || side_effects_p (PATTERN (x)))
6873           dest = pc_rtx;
6874       if (code == CALL_INSN)
6875           count_reg_usage (CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (x), counts, dest, incr);
6876       count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, dest, incr);
6877 
6878       /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
6879            use them.  */
6880 
6881       note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (x);
6882       if (note)
6883           {
6884             rtx eqv = XEXP (note, 0);
6885 
6886             if (GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST)
6887             /* This REG_EQUAL note describes the result of a function call.
6888                Process all the arguments.  */
6889               do
6890                 {
6891                     count_reg_usage (XEXP (eqv, 0), counts, dest, incr);
6892                     eqv = XEXP (eqv, 1);
6893                 }
6894               while (eqv && GET_CODE (eqv) == EXPR_LIST);
6895             else
6896               count_reg_usage (eqv, counts, dest, incr);
6897           }
6898       return;
6899 
6900     case EXPR_LIST:
6901       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL
6902             || (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) != REG_NONNEG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x,0)) == USE)
6903             /* FUNCTION_USAGE expression lists may include (CLOBBER (mem /u)),
6904                involving registers in the address.  */
6905             || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
6906           count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6907 
6908       count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, NULL_RTX, incr);
6909       return;
6910 
6911     case ASM_OPERANDS:
6912       /* Iterate over just the inputs, not the constraints as well.  */
6913       for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (x) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6914           count_reg_usage (ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
6915       return;
6916 
6917     case INSN_LIST:
6918     case INT_LIST:
6919       gcc_unreachable ();
6920 
6921     default:
6922       break;
6923     }
6924 
6925   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6926   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6927     {
6928       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6929           count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, dest, incr);
6930       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6931           for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6932             count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, dest, incr);
6933     }
6934 }
6935 
6936 /* Return true if X is a dead register.  */
6937 
6938 static inline int
is_dead_reg(const_rtx x,int * counts)6939 is_dead_reg (const_rtx x, int *counts)
6940 {
6941   return (REG_P (x)
6942             && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6943             && counts[REGNO (x)] == 0);
6944 }
6945 
6946 /* Return true if set is live.  */
6947 static bool
set_live_p(rtx set,rtx_insn * insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,int * counts)6948 set_live_p (rtx set, rtx_insn *insn ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, /* Only used with HAVE_cc0.  */
6949               int *counts)
6950 {
6951   rtx_insn *tem;
6952 
6953   if (set_noop_p (set))
6954     ;
6955 
6956   else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == CC0
6957              && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
6958              && ((tem = next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (insn)) == NULL_RTX
6959                  || !INSN_P (tem)
6960                  || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
6961     return false;
6962   else if (!is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
6963              || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set)))
6964     return true;
6965   return false;
6966 }
6967 
6968 /* Return true if insn is live.  */
6969 
6970 static bool
insn_live_p(rtx_insn * insn,int * counts)6971 insn_live_p (rtx_insn *insn, int *counts)
6972 {
6973   int i;
6974   if (!cfun->can_delete_dead_exceptions && !insn_nothrow_p (insn))
6975     return true;
6976   else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
6977     return set_live_p (PATTERN (insn), insn, counts);
6978   else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6979     {
6980       for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6981           {
6982             rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
6983 
6984             if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
6985               {
6986                 if (set_live_p (elt, insn, counts))
6987                     return true;
6988               }
6989             else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
6990               return true;
6991           }
6992       return false;
6993     }
6994   else if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
6995     {
6996       rtx_insn *next;
6997 
6998       if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (insn))
6999           return true;
7000 
7001       for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn); next; next = NEXT_INSN (next))
7002           if (NOTE_P (next))
7003             continue;
7004           else if (!DEBUG_INSN_P (next))
7005             return true;
7006           /* If we find an inspection point, such as a debug begin stmt,
7007              we want to keep the earlier debug insn.  */
7008           else if (DEBUG_MARKER_INSN_P (next))
7009             return true;
7010           else if (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (insn) == INSN_VAR_LOCATION_DECL (next))
7011             return false;
7012 
7013       return true;
7014     }
7015   else
7016     return true;
7017 }
7018 
7019 /* Count the number of stores into pseudo.  Callback for note_stores.  */
7020 
7021 static void
count_stores(rtx x,const_rtx set ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,void * data)7022 count_stores (rtx x, const_rtx set ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
7023 {
7024   int *counts = (int *) data;
7025   if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
7026     counts[REGNO (x)]++;
7027 }
7028 
7029 /* Return if DEBUG_INSN pattern PAT needs to be reset because some dead
7030    pseudo doesn't have a replacement.  COUNTS[X] is zero if register X
7031    is dead and REPLACEMENTS[X] is null if it has no replacemenet.
7032    Set *SEEN_REPL to true if we see a dead register that does have
7033    a replacement.  */
7034 
7035 static bool
is_dead_debug_insn(const_rtx pat,int * counts,rtx * replacements,bool * seen_repl)7036 is_dead_debug_insn (const_rtx pat, int *counts, rtx *replacements,
7037                         bool *seen_repl)
7038 {
7039   subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
7040   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, pat, NONCONST)
7041     {
7042       const_rtx x = *iter;
7043       if (is_dead_reg (x, counts))
7044           {
7045             if (replacements && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
7046               *seen_repl = true;
7047             else
7048               return true;
7049           }
7050     }
7051   return false;
7052 }
7053 
7054 /* Replace a dead pseudo in a DEBUG_INSN with replacement DEBUG_EXPR.
7055    Callback for simplify_replace_fn_rtx.  */
7056 
7057 static rtx
replace_dead_reg(rtx x,const_rtx old_rtx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,void * data)7058 replace_dead_reg (rtx x, const_rtx old_rtx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
7059 {
7060   rtx *replacements = (rtx *) data;
7061 
7062   if (REG_P (x)
7063       && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7064       && replacements[REGNO (x)] != NULL_RTX)
7065     {
7066       if (GET_MODE (x) == GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]))
7067           return replacements[REGNO (x)];
7068       return lowpart_subreg (GET_MODE (x), replacements[REGNO (x)],
7069                                    GET_MODE (replacements[REGNO (x)]));
7070     }
7071   return NULL_RTX;
7072 }
7073 
7074 /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7075    that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7076 
7077    This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse, loop or other
7078    optimizations.  It improves the heuristics in loop since it won't try to
7079    move dead invariants out of loops or make givs for dead quantities.  The
7080    remaining passes of the compilation are also sped up.  */
7081 
7082 int
delete_trivially_dead_insns(rtx_insn * insns,int nreg)7083 delete_trivially_dead_insns (rtx_insn *insns, int nreg)
7084 {
7085   int *counts;
7086   rtx_insn *insn, *prev;
7087   rtx *replacements = NULL;
7088   int ndead = 0;
7089 
7090   timevar_push (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
7091   /* First count the number of times each register is used.  */
7092   if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
7093     {
7094       counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg * 3);
7095       for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7096           if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7097             count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
7098                                  NULL_RTX, 1);
7099           else if (INSN_P (insn))
7100             {
7101               count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
7102               note_stores (PATTERN (insn), count_stores, counts + nreg * 2);
7103             }
7104       /* If there can be debug insns, COUNTS are 3 consecutive arrays.
7105            First one counts how many times each pseudo is used outside
7106            of debug insns, second counts how many times each pseudo is
7107            used in debug insns and third counts how many times a pseudo
7108            is stored.  */
7109     }
7110   else
7111     {
7112       counts = XCNEWVEC (int, nreg);
7113       for (insn = insns; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7114           if (INSN_P (insn))
7115             count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, 1);
7116       /* If no debug insns can be present, COUNTS is just an array
7117            which counts how many times each pseudo is used.  */
7118     }
7119   /* Pseudo PIC register should be considered as used due to possible
7120      new usages generated.  */
7121   if (!reload_completed
7122       && pic_offset_table_rtx
7123       && REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
7124     counts[REGNO (pic_offset_table_rtx)]++;
7125   /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7126      registers or copy a register to itself.  As we delete an insn, remove
7127      usage counts for registers it uses.
7128 
7129      The first jump optimization pass may leave a real insn as the last
7130      insn in the function.   We must not skip that insn or we may end
7131      up deleting code that is not really dead.
7132 
7133      If some otherwise unused register is only used in DEBUG_INSNs,
7134      try to create a DEBUG_EXPR temporary and emit a DEBUG_INSN before
7135      the setter.  Then go through DEBUG_INSNs and if a DEBUG_EXPR
7136      has been created for the unused register, replace it with
7137      the DEBUG_EXPR, otherwise reset the DEBUG_INSN.  */
7138   for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = prev)
7139     {
7140       int live_insn = 0;
7141 
7142       prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
7143       if (!INSN_P (insn))
7144           continue;
7145 
7146       live_insn = insn_live_p (insn, counts);
7147 
7148       /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
7149            being used.  */
7150 
7151       if (! live_insn && dbg_cnt (delete_trivial_dead))
7152           {
7153             if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
7154               {
7155                 if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7156                     count_reg_usage (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn), counts + nreg,
7157                                          NULL_RTX, -1);
7158               }
7159             else
7160               {
7161                 rtx set;
7162                 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS
7163                       && (set = single_set (insn)) != NULL_RTX
7164                       && is_dead_reg (SET_DEST (set), counts)
7165                       /* Used at least once in some DEBUG_INSN.  */
7166                       && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg] > 0
7167                       /* And set exactly once.  */
7168                       && counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) + nreg * 2] == 1
7169                       && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
7170                       && asm_noperands (PATTERN (insn)) < 0)
7171                     {
7172                       rtx dval, bind_var_loc;
7173                       rtx_insn *bind;
7174 
7175                       /* Create DEBUG_EXPR (and DEBUG_EXPR_DECL).  */
7176                       dval = make_debug_expr_from_rtl (SET_DEST (set));
7177 
7178                       /* Emit a debug bind insn before the insn in which
7179                          reg dies.  */
7180                       bind_var_loc =
7181                         gen_rtx_VAR_LOCATION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)),
7182                                                     DEBUG_EXPR_TREE_DECL (dval),
7183                                                     SET_SRC (set),
7184                                                     VAR_INIT_STATUS_INITIALIZED);
7185                       count_reg_usage (bind_var_loc, counts + nreg, NULL_RTX, 1);
7186 
7187                       bind = emit_debug_insn_before (bind_var_loc, insn);
7188                       df_insn_rescan (bind);
7189 
7190                       if (replacements == NULL)
7191                         replacements = XCNEWVEC (rtx, nreg);
7192                       replacements[REGNO (SET_DEST (set))] = dval;
7193                     }
7194 
7195                 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, NULL_RTX, -1);
7196                 ndead++;
7197               }
7198             cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
7199           }
7200     }
7201 
7202   if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_BIND_INSNS)
7203     {
7204       for (insn = get_last_insn (); insn; insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7205           if (DEBUG_BIND_INSN_P (insn))
7206             {
7207               /* If this debug insn references a dead register that wasn't replaced
7208                  with an DEBUG_EXPR, reset the DEBUG_INSN.  */
7209               bool seen_repl = false;
7210               if (is_dead_debug_insn (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
7211                                             counts, replacements, &seen_repl))
7212                 {
7213                     INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn) = gen_rtx_UNKNOWN_VAR_LOC ();
7214                     df_insn_rescan (insn);
7215                 }
7216               else if (seen_repl)
7217                 {
7218                     INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn)
7219                       = simplify_replace_fn_rtx (INSN_VAR_LOCATION_LOC (insn),
7220                                                        NULL_RTX, replace_dead_reg,
7221                                                        replacements);
7222                     df_insn_rescan (insn);
7223                 }
7224             }
7225       free (replacements);
7226     }
7227 
7228   if (dump_file && ndead)
7229     fprintf (dump_file, "Deleted %i trivially dead insns\n",
7230                ndead);
7231   /* Clean up.  */
7232   free (counts);
7233   timevar_pop (TV_DELETE_TRIVIALLY_DEAD);
7234   return ndead;
7235 }
7236 
7237 /* If LOC contains references to NEWREG in a different mode, change them
7238    to use NEWREG instead.  */
7239 
7240 static void
cse_change_cc_mode(subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type & array,rtx * loc,rtx_insn * insn,rtx newreg)7241 cse_change_cc_mode (subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type &array,
7242                         rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
7243 {
7244   FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, loc, NONCONST)
7245     {
7246       rtx *loc = *iter;
7247       rtx x = *loc;
7248       if (x
7249             && REG_P (x)
7250             && REGNO (x) == REGNO (newreg)
7251             && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (newreg))
7252           {
7253             validate_change (insn, loc, newreg, 1);
7254             iter.skip_subrtxes ();
7255           }
7256     }
7257 }
7258 
7259 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
7260    GET_MODE (NEWREG) in INSN.  */
7261 
7262 static void
cse_change_cc_mode_insn(rtx_insn * insn,rtx newreg)7263 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (rtx_insn *insn, rtx newreg)
7264 {
7265   int success;
7266 
7267   if (!INSN_P (insn))
7268     return;
7269 
7270   subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array;
7271   cse_change_cc_mode (array, &PATTERN (insn), insn, newreg);
7272   cse_change_cc_mode (array, &REG_NOTES (insn), insn, newreg);
7273 
7274   /* If the following assertion was triggered, there is most probably
7275      something wrong with the cc_modes_compatible back end function.
7276      CC modes only can be considered compatible if the insn - with the mode
7277      replaced by any of the compatible modes - can still be recognized.  */
7278   success = apply_change_group ();
7279   gcc_assert (success);
7280 }
7281 
7282 /* Change the mode of any reference to the register REGNO (NEWREG) to
7283    GET_MODE (NEWREG), starting at START.  Stop before END.  Stop at
7284    any instruction which modifies NEWREG.  */
7285 
7286 static void
cse_change_cc_mode_insns(rtx_insn * start,rtx_insn * end,rtx newreg)7287 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (rtx_insn *start, rtx_insn *end, rtx newreg)
7288 {
7289   rtx_insn *insn;
7290 
7291   for (insn = start; insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7292     {
7293       if (! INSN_P (insn))
7294           continue;
7295 
7296       if (reg_set_p (newreg, insn))
7297           return;
7298 
7299       cse_change_cc_mode_insn (insn, newreg);
7300     }
7301 }
7302 
7303 /* BB is a basic block which finishes with CC_REG as a condition code
7304    register which is set to CC_SRC.  Look through the successors of BB
7305    to find blocks which have a single predecessor (i.e., this one),
7306    and look through those blocks for an assignment to CC_REG which is
7307    equivalent to CC_SRC.  CAN_CHANGE_MODE indicates whether we are
7308    permitted to change the mode of CC_SRC to a compatible mode.  This
7309    returns VOIDmode if no equivalent assignments were found.
7310    Otherwise it returns the mode which CC_SRC should wind up with.
7311    ORIG_BB should be the same as BB in the outermost cse_cc_succs call,
7312    but is passed unmodified down to recursive calls in order to prevent
7313    endless recursion.
7314 
7315    The main complexity in this function is handling the mode issues.
7316    We may have more than one duplicate which we can eliminate, and we
7317    try to find a mode which will work for multiple duplicates.  */
7318 
7319 static machine_mode
cse_cc_succs(basic_block bb,basic_block orig_bb,rtx cc_reg,rtx cc_src,bool can_change_mode)7320 cse_cc_succs (basic_block bb, basic_block orig_bb, rtx cc_reg, rtx cc_src,
7321                 bool can_change_mode)
7322 {
7323   bool found_equiv;
7324   machine_mode mode;
7325   unsigned int insn_count;
7326   edge e;
7327   rtx_insn *insns[2];
7328   machine_mode modes[2];
7329   rtx_insn *last_insns[2];
7330   unsigned int i;
7331   rtx newreg;
7332   edge_iterator ei;
7333 
7334   /* We expect to have two successors.  Look at both before picking
7335      the final mode for the comparison.  If we have more successors
7336      (i.e., some sort of table jump, although that seems unlikely),
7337      then we require all beyond the first two to use the same
7338      mode.  */
7339 
7340   found_equiv = false;
7341   mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
7342   insn_count = 0;
7343   FOR_EACH_EDGE (e, ei, bb->succs)
7344     {
7345       rtx_insn *insn;
7346       rtx_insn *end;
7347 
7348       if (e->flags & EDGE_COMPLEX)
7349           continue;
7350 
7351       if (EDGE_COUNT (e->dest->preds) != 1
7352             || e->dest == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
7353             /* Avoid endless recursion on unreachable blocks.  */
7354             || e->dest == orig_bb)
7355           continue;
7356 
7357       end = NEXT_INSN (BB_END (e->dest));
7358       for (insn = BB_HEAD (e->dest); insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7359           {
7360             rtx set;
7361 
7362             if (! INSN_P (insn))
7363               continue;
7364 
7365             /* If CC_SRC is modified, we have to stop looking for
7366                something which uses it.  */
7367             if (modified_in_p (cc_src, insn))
7368               break;
7369 
7370             /* Check whether INSN sets CC_REG to CC_SRC.  */
7371             set = single_set (insn);
7372             if (set
7373                 && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
7374                 && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
7375               {
7376                 bool found;
7377                 machine_mode set_mode;
7378                 machine_mode comp_mode;
7379 
7380                 found = false;
7381                 set_mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (set));
7382                 comp_mode = set_mode;
7383                 if (rtx_equal_p (cc_src, SET_SRC (set)))
7384                     found = true;
7385                 else if (GET_CODE (cc_src) == COMPARE
7386                            && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == COMPARE
7387                            && mode != set_mode
7388                            && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 0),
7389                                                XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0))
7390                            && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cc_src, 1),
7391                                                XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 1)))
7392 
7393                     {
7394                       comp_mode = targetm.cc_modes_compatible (mode, set_mode);
7395                       if (comp_mode != VOIDmode
7396                           && (can_change_mode || comp_mode == mode))
7397                         found = true;
7398                     }
7399 
7400                 if (found)
7401                     {
7402                       found_equiv = true;
7403                       if (insn_count < ARRAY_SIZE (insns))
7404                         {
7405                           insns[insn_count] = insn;
7406                           modes[insn_count] = set_mode;
7407                           last_insns[insn_count] = end;
7408                           ++insn_count;
7409 
7410                           if (mode != comp_mode)
7411                               {
7412                                 gcc_assert (can_change_mode);
7413                                 mode = comp_mode;
7414 
7415                                 /* The modified insn will be re-recognized later.  */
7416                                 PUT_MODE (cc_src, mode);
7417                               }
7418                         }
7419                       else
7420                         {
7421                           if (set_mode != mode)
7422                               {
7423                                 /* We found a matching expression in the
7424                                    wrong mode, but we don't have room to
7425                                    store it in the array.  Punt.  This case
7426                                    should be rare.  */
7427                                 break;
7428                               }
7429                           /* INSN sets CC_REG to a value equal to CC_SRC
7430                                with the right mode.  We can simply delete
7431                                it.  */
7432                           delete_insn (insn);
7433                         }
7434 
7435                       /* We found an instruction to delete.  Keep looking,
7436                          in the hopes of finding a three-way jump.  */
7437                       continue;
7438                     }
7439 
7440                 /* We found an instruction which sets the condition
7441                      code, so don't look any farther.  */
7442                 break;
7443               }
7444 
7445             /* If INSN sets CC_REG in some other way, don't look any
7446                farther.  */
7447             if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
7448               break;
7449           }
7450 
7451       /* If we fell off the bottom of the block, we can keep looking
7452            through successors.  We pass CAN_CHANGE_MODE as false because
7453            we aren't prepared to handle compatibility between the
7454            further blocks and this block.  */
7455       if (insn == end)
7456           {
7457             machine_mode submode;
7458 
7459             submode = cse_cc_succs (e->dest, orig_bb, cc_reg, cc_src, false);
7460             if (submode != VOIDmode)
7461               {
7462                 gcc_assert (submode == mode);
7463                 found_equiv = true;
7464                 can_change_mode = false;
7465               }
7466           }
7467     }
7468 
7469   if (! found_equiv)
7470     return VOIDmode;
7471 
7472   /* Now INSN_COUNT is the number of instructions we found which set
7473      CC_REG to a value equivalent to CC_SRC.  The instructions are in
7474      INSNS.  The modes used by those instructions are in MODES.  */
7475 
7476   newreg = NULL_RTX;
7477   for (i = 0; i < insn_count; ++i)
7478     {
7479       if (modes[i] != mode)
7480           {
7481             /* We need to change the mode of CC_REG in INSNS[i] and
7482                subsequent instructions.  */
7483             if (! newreg)
7484               {
7485                 if (GET_MODE (cc_reg) == mode)
7486                     newreg = cc_reg;
7487                 else
7488                     newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
7489               }
7490             cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (insns[i]), last_insns[i],
7491                                             newreg);
7492           }
7493 
7494       cse_cfg_altered |= delete_insn_and_edges (insns[i]);
7495     }
7496 
7497   return mode;
7498 }
7499 
7500 /* If we have a fixed condition code register (or two), walk through
7501    the instructions and try to eliminate duplicate assignments.  */
7502 
7503 static void
cse_condition_code_reg(void)7504 cse_condition_code_reg (void)
7505 {
7506   unsigned int cc_regno_1;
7507   unsigned int cc_regno_2;
7508   rtx cc_reg_1;
7509   rtx cc_reg_2;
7510   basic_block bb;
7511 
7512   if (! targetm.fixed_condition_code_regs (&cc_regno_1, &cc_regno_2))
7513     return;
7514 
7515   cc_reg_1 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_1);
7516   if (cc_regno_2 != INVALID_REGNUM)
7517     cc_reg_2 = gen_rtx_REG (CCmode, cc_regno_2);
7518   else
7519     cc_reg_2 = NULL_RTX;
7520 
7521   FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
7522     {
7523       rtx_insn *last_insn;
7524       rtx cc_reg;
7525       rtx_insn *insn;
7526       rtx_insn *cc_src_insn;
7527       rtx cc_src;
7528       machine_mode mode;
7529       machine_mode orig_mode;
7530 
7531       /* Look for blocks which end with a conditional jump based on a
7532            condition code register.  Then look for the instruction which
7533            sets the condition code register.  Then look through the
7534            successor blocks for instructions which set the condition
7535            code register to the same value.  There are other possible
7536            uses of the condition code register, but these are by far the
7537            most common and the ones which we are most likely to be able
7538            to optimize.  */
7539 
7540       last_insn = BB_END (bb);
7541       if (!JUMP_P (last_insn))
7542           continue;
7543 
7544       if (reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_1, PATTERN (last_insn)))
7545           cc_reg = cc_reg_1;
7546       else if (cc_reg_2 && reg_referenced_p (cc_reg_2, PATTERN (last_insn)))
7547           cc_reg = cc_reg_2;
7548       else
7549           continue;
7550 
7551       cc_src_insn = NULL;
7552       cc_src = NULL_RTX;
7553       for (insn = PREV_INSN (last_insn);
7554              insn && insn != PREV_INSN (BB_HEAD (bb));
7555              insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
7556           {
7557             rtx set;
7558 
7559             if (! INSN_P (insn))
7560               continue;
7561             set = single_set (insn);
7562             if (set
7563                 && REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
7564                 && REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) == REGNO (cc_reg))
7565               {
7566                 cc_src_insn = insn;
7567                 cc_src = SET_SRC (set);
7568                 break;
7569               }
7570             else if (reg_set_p (cc_reg, insn))
7571               break;
7572           }
7573 
7574       if (! cc_src_insn)
7575           continue;
7576 
7577       if (modified_between_p (cc_src, cc_src_insn, NEXT_INSN (last_insn)))
7578           continue;
7579 
7580       /* Now CC_REG is a condition code register used for a
7581            conditional jump at the end of the block, and CC_SRC, in
7582            CC_SRC_INSN, is the value to which that condition code
7583            register is set, and CC_SRC is still meaningful at the end of
7584            the basic block.  */
7585 
7586       orig_mode = GET_MODE (cc_src);
7587       mode = cse_cc_succs (bb, bb, cc_reg, cc_src, true);
7588       if (mode != VOIDmode)
7589           {
7590             gcc_assert (mode == GET_MODE (cc_src));
7591             if (mode != orig_mode)
7592               {
7593                 rtx newreg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, REGNO (cc_reg));
7594 
7595                 cse_change_cc_mode_insn (cc_src_insn, newreg);
7596 
7597                 /* Do the same in the following insns that use the
7598                      current value of CC_REG within BB.  */
7599                 cse_change_cc_mode_insns (NEXT_INSN (cc_src_insn),
7600                                                   NEXT_INSN (last_insn),
7601                                                   newreg);
7602               }
7603           }
7604     }
7605 }
7606 
7607 
7608 /* Perform common subexpression elimination.  Nonzero value from
7609    `cse_main' means that jumps were simplified and some code may now
7610    be unreachable, so do jump optimization again.  */
7611 static unsigned int
rest_of_handle_cse(void)7612 rest_of_handle_cse (void)
7613 {
7614   int tem;
7615 
7616   if (dump_file)
7617     dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
7618 
7619   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7620 
7621   /* If we are not running more CSE passes, then we are no longer
7622      expecting CSE to be run.  But always rerun it in a cheap mode.  */
7623   cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop && !flag_gcse;
7624 
7625   if (tem == 2)
7626     {
7627       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7628       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7629       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7630       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7631     }
7632   else if (tem == 1 || optimize > 1)
7633     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7634 
7635   return 0;
7636 }
7637 
7638 namespace {
7639 
7640 const pass_data pass_data_cse =
7641 {
7642   RTL_PASS, /* type */
7643   "cse1", /* name */
7644   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7645   TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
7646   0, /* properties_required */
7647   0, /* properties_provided */
7648   0, /* properties_destroyed */
7649   0, /* todo_flags_start */
7650   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7651 };
7652 
7653 class pass_cse : public rtl_opt_pass
7654 {
7655 public:
pass_cse(gcc::context * ctxt)7656   pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
7657     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse, ctxt)
7658   {}
7659 
7660   /* opt_pass methods: */
gate(function *)7661   virtual bool gate (function *) { return optimize > 0; }
execute(function *)7662   virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse (); }
7663 
7664 }; // class pass_cse
7665 
7666 } // anon namespace
7667 
7668 rtl_opt_pass *
make_pass_cse(gcc::context * ctxt)7669 make_pass_cse (gcc::context *ctxt)
7670 {
7671   return new pass_cse (ctxt);
7672 }
7673 
7674 
7675 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations.  */
7676 static unsigned int
rest_of_handle_cse2(void)7677 rest_of_handle_cse2 (void)
7678 {
7679   int tem;
7680 
7681   if (dump_file)
7682     dump_flow_info (dump_file, dump_flags);
7683 
7684   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7685 
7686   /* Run a pass to eliminate duplicated assignments to condition code
7687      registers.  We have to run this after bypass_jumps, because it
7688      makes it harder for that pass to determine whether a jump can be
7689      bypassed safely.  */
7690   cse_condition_code_reg ();
7691 
7692   delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7693 
7694   if (tem == 2)
7695     {
7696       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7697       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7698       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7699       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7700     }
7701   else if (tem == 1)
7702     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7703 
7704   cse_not_expected = 1;
7705   return 0;
7706 }
7707 
7708 
7709 namespace {
7710 
7711 const pass_data pass_data_cse2 =
7712 {
7713   RTL_PASS, /* type */
7714   "cse2", /* name */
7715   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7716   TV_CSE2, /* tv_id */
7717   0, /* properties_required */
7718   0, /* properties_provided */
7719   0, /* properties_destroyed */
7720   0, /* todo_flags_start */
7721   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7722 };
7723 
7724 class pass_cse2 : public rtl_opt_pass
7725 {
7726 public:
pass_cse2(gcc::context * ctxt)7727   pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
7728     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse2, ctxt)
7729   {}
7730 
7731   /* opt_pass methods: */
gate(function *)7732   virtual bool gate (function *)
7733     {
7734       return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
7735     }
7736 
execute(function *)7737   virtual unsigned int execute (function *) { return rest_of_handle_cse2 (); }
7738 
7739 }; // class pass_cse2
7740 
7741 } // anon namespace
7742 
7743 rtl_opt_pass *
make_pass_cse2(gcc::context * ctxt)7744 make_pass_cse2 (gcc::context *ctxt)
7745 {
7746   return new pass_cse2 (ctxt);
7747 }
7748 
7749 /* Run second CSE pass after loop optimizations.  */
7750 static unsigned int
rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts(void)7751 rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts (void)
7752 {
7753   int save_cfj;
7754   int tem;
7755 
7756   /* We only want to do local CSE, so don't follow jumps.  */
7757   save_cfj = flag_cse_follow_jumps;
7758   flag_cse_follow_jumps = 0;
7759 
7760   rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7761   tem = cse_main (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7762   cse_cfg_altered |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
7763   delete_trivially_dead_insns (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
7764 
7765   cse_not_expected = !flag_rerun_cse_after_loop;
7766 
7767   /* If cse altered any jumps, rerun jump opts to clean things up.  */
7768   if (tem == 2)
7769     {
7770       timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
7771       rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
7772       cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (CLEANUP_CFG_CHANGED);
7773       timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
7774     }
7775   else if (tem == 1)
7776     cse_cfg_altered |= cleanup_cfg (0);
7777 
7778   flag_cse_follow_jumps = save_cfj;
7779   return 0;
7780 }
7781 
7782 namespace {
7783 
7784 const pass_data pass_data_cse_after_global_opts =
7785 {
7786   RTL_PASS, /* type */
7787   "cse_local", /* name */
7788   OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
7789   TV_CSE, /* tv_id */
7790   0, /* properties_required */
7791   0, /* properties_provided */
7792   0, /* properties_destroyed */
7793   0, /* todo_flags_start */
7794   TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
7795 };
7796 
7797 class pass_cse_after_global_opts : public rtl_opt_pass
7798 {
7799 public:
pass_cse_after_global_opts(gcc::context * ctxt)7800   pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
7801     : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_cse_after_global_opts, ctxt)
7802   {}
7803 
7804   /* opt_pass methods: */
gate(function *)7805   virtual bool gate (function *)
7806     {
7807       return optimize > 0 && flag_rerun_cse_after_global_opts;
7808     }
7809 
execute(function *)7810   virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
7811     {
7812       return rest_of_handle_cse_after_global_opts ();
7813     }
7814 
7815 }; // class pass_cse_after_global_opts
7816 
7817 } // anon namespace
7818 
7819 rtl_opt_pass *
make_pass_cse_after_global_opts(gcc::context * ctxt)7820 make_pass_cse_after_global_opts (gcc::context *ctxt)
7821 {
7822   return new pass_cse_after_global_opts (ctxt);
7823 }
7824